• Home
  • Line#
  • Scopes#
  • Navigate#
  • Raw
  • Download
1 //===--- ASTContext.cpp - Context to hold long-lived AST nodes ------------===//
2 //
3 //                     The LLVM Compiler Infrastructure
4 //
5 // This file is distributed under the University of Illinois Open Source
6 // License. See LICENSE.TXT for details.
7 //
8 //===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
9 //
10 //  This file implements the ASTContext interface.
11 //
12 //===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
13 
14 #include "clang/AST/ASTContext.h"
15 #include "clang/AST/CharUnits.h"
16 #include "clang/AST/CommentCommandTraits.h"
17 #include "clang/AST/DeclCXX.h"
18 #include "clang/AST/DeclObjC.h"
19 #include "clang/AST/DeclTemplate.h"
20 #include "clang/AST/TypeLoc.h"
21 #include "clang/AST/Expr.h"
22 #include "clang/AST/ExprCXX.h"
23 #include "clang/AST/ExternalASTSource.h"
24 #include "clang/AST/ASTMutationListener.h"
25 #include "clang/AST/RecordLayout.h"
26 #include "clang/AST/Mangle.h"
27 #include "clang/Basic/Builtins.h"
28 #include "clang/Basic/SourceManager.h"
29 #include "clang/Basic/TargetInfo.h"
30 #include "llvm/ADT/SmallString.h"
31 #include "llvm/ADT/StringExtras.h"
32 #include "llvm/Support/MathExtras.h"
33 #include "llvm/Support/raw_ostream.h"
34 #include "llvm/Support/Capacity.h"
35 #include "CXXABI.h"
36 #include <map>
37 
38 using namespace clang;
39 
40 unsigned ASTContext::NumImplicitDefaultConstructors;
41 unsigned ASTContext::NumImplicitDefaultConstructorsDeclared;
42 unsigned ASTContext::NumImplicitCopyConstructors;
43 unsigned ASTContext::NumImplicitCopyConstructorsDeclared;
44 unsigned ASTContext::NumImplicitMoveConstructors;
45 unsigned ASTContext::NumImplicitMoveConstructorsDeclared;
46 unsigned ASTContext::NumImplicitCopyAssignmentOperators;
47 unsigned ASTContext::NumImplicitCopyAssignmentOperatorsDeclared;
48 unsigned ASTContext::NumImplicitMoveAssignmentOperators;
49 unsigned ASTContext::NumImplicitMoveAssignmentOperatorsDeclared;
50 unsigned ASTContext::NumImplicitDestructors;
51 unsigned ASTContext::NumImplicitDestructorsDeclared;
52 
53 enum FloatingRank {
54   HalfRank, FloatRank, DoubleRank, LongDoubleRank
55 };
56 
getRawCommentForDeclNoCache(const Decl * D) const57 RawComment *ASTContext::getRawCommentForDeclNoCache(const Decl *D) const {
58   if (!CommentsLoaded && ExternalSource) {
59     ExternalSource->ReadComments();
60     CommentsLoaded = true;
61   }
62 
63   assert(D);
64 
65   // User can not attach documentation to implicit declarations.
66   if (D->isImplicit())
67     return NULL;
68 
69   // User can not attach documentation to implicit instantiations.
70   if (const FunctionDecl *FD = dyn_cast<FunctionDecl>(D)) {
71     if (FD->getTemplateSpecializationKind() == TSK_ImplicitInstantiation)
72       return NULL;
73   }
74 
75   if (const VarDecl *VD = dyn_cast<VarDecl>(D)) {
76     if (VD->isStaticDataMember() &&
77         VD->getTemplateSpecializationKind() == TSK_ImplicitInstantiation)
78       return NULL;
79   }
80 
81   if (const CXXRecordDecl *CRD = dyn_cast<CXXRecordDecl>(D)) {
82     if (CRD->getTemplateSpecializationKind() == TSK_ImplicitInstantiation)
83       return NULL;
84   }
85 
86   if (const EnumDecl *ED = dyn_cast<EnumDecl>(D)) {
87     if (ED->getTemplateSpecializationKind() == TSK_ImplicitInstantiation)
88       return NULL;
89   }
90 
91   // TODO: handle comments for function parameters properly.
92   if (isa<ParmVarDecl>(D))
93     return NULL;
94 
95   // TODO: we could look up template parameter documentation in the template
96   // documentation.
97   if (isa<TemplateTypeParmDecl>(D) ||
98       isa<NonTypeTemplateParmDecl>(D) ||
99       isa<TemplateTemplateParmDecl>(D))
100     return NULL;
101 
102   ArrayRef<RawComment *> RawComments = Comments.getComments();
103 
104   // If there are no comments anywhere, we won't find anything.
105   if (RawComments.empty())
106     return NULL;
107 
108   // Find declaration location.
109   // For Objective-C declarations we generally don't expect to have multiple
110   // declarators, thus use declaration starting location as the "declaration
111   // location".
112   // For all other declarations multiple declarators are used quite frequently,
113   // so we use the location of the identifier as the "declaration location".
114   SourceLocation DeclLoc;
115   if (isa<ObjCMethodDecl>(D) || isa<ObjCContainerDecl>(D) ||
116       isa<ObjCPropertyDecl>(D) ||
117       isa<RedeclarableTemplateDecl>(D) ||
118       isa<ClassTemplateSpecializationDecl>(D))
119     DeclLoc = D->getLocStart();
120   else
121     DeclLoc = D->getLocation();
122 
123   // If the declaration doesn't map directly to a location in a file, we
124   // can't find the comment.
125   if (DeclLoc.isInvalid() || !DeclLoc.isFileID())
126     return NULL;
127 
128   // Find the comment that occurs just after this declaration.
129   ArrayRef<RawComment *>::iterator Comment;
130   {
131     // When searching for comments during parsing, the comment we are looking
132     // for is usually among the last two comments we parsed -- check them
133     // first.
134     RawComment CommentAtDeclLoc(SourceMgr, SourceRange(DeclLoc));
135     BeforeThanCompare<RawComment> Compare(SourceMgr);
136     ArrayRef<RawComment *>::iterator MaybeBeforeDecl = RawComments.end() - 1;
137     bool Found = Compare(*MaybeBeforeDecl, &CommentAtDeclLoc);
138     if (!Found && RawComments.size() >= 2) {
139       MaybeBeforeDecl--;
140       Found = Compare(*MaybeBeforeDecl, &CommentAtDeclLoc);
141     }
142 
143     if (Found) {
144       Comment = MaybeBeforeDecl + 1;
145       assert(Comment == std::lower_bound(RawComments.begin(), RawComments.end(),
146                                          &CommentAtDeclLoc, Compare));
147     } else {
148       // Slow path.
149       Comment = std::lower_bound(RawComments.begin(), RawComments.end(),
150                                  &CommentAtDeclLoc, Compare);
151     }
152   }
153 
154   // Decompose the location for the declaration and find the beginning of the
155   // file buffer.
156   std::pair<FileID, unsigned> DeclLocDecomp = SourceMgr.getDecomposedLoc(DeclLoc);
157 
158   // First check whether we have a trailing comment.
159   if (Comment != RawComments.end() &&
160       (*Comment)->isDocumentation() && (*Comment)->isTrailingComment() &&
161       (isa<FieldDecl>(D) || isa<EnumConstantDecl>(D) || isa<VarDecl>(D))) {
162     std::pair<FileID, unsigned> CommentBeginDecomp
163       = SourceMgr.getDecomposedLoc((*Comment)->getSourceRange().getBegin());
164     // Check that Doxygen trailing comment comes after the declaration, starts
165     // on the same line and in the same file as the declaration.
166     if (DeclLocDecomp.first == CommentBeginDecomp.first &&
167         SourceMgr.getLineNumber(DeclLocDecomp.first, DeclLocDecomp.second)
168           == SourceMgr.getLineNumber(CommentBeginDecomp.first,
169                                      CommentBeginDecomp.second)) {
170       return *Comment;
171     }
172   }
173 
174   // The comment just after the declaration was not a trailing comment.
175   // Let's look at the previous comment.
176   if (Comment == RawComments.begin())
177     return NULL;
178   --Comment;
179 
180   // Check that we actually have a non-member Doxygen comment.
181   if (!(*Comment)->isDocumentation() || (*Comment)->isTrailingComment())
182     return NULL;
183 
184   // Decompose the end of the comment.
185   std::pair<FileID, unsigned> CommentEndDecomp
186     = SourceMgr.getDecomposedLoc((*Comment)->getSourceRange().getEnd());
187 
188   // If the comment and the declaration aren't in the same file, then they
189   // aren't related.
190   if (DeclLocDecomp.first != CommentEndDecomp.first)
191     return NULL;
192 
193   // Get the corresponding buffer.
194   bool Invalid = false;
195   const char *Buffer = SourceMgr.getBufferData(DeclLocDecomp.first,
196                                                &Invalid).data();
197   if (Invalid)
198     return NULL;
199 
200   // Extract text between the comment and declaration.
201   StringRef Text(Buffer + CommentEndDecomp.second,
202                  DeclLocDecomp.second - CommentEndDecomp.second);
203 
204   // There should be no other declarations or preprocessor directives between
205   // comment and declaration.
206   if (Text.find_first_of(",;{}#@") != StringRef::npos)
207     return NULL;
208 
209   return *Comment;
210 }
211 
212 namespace {
213 /// If we have a 'templated' declaration for a template, adjust 'D' to
214 /// refer to the actual template.
215 /// If we have an implicit instantiation, adjust 'D' to refer to template.
adjustDeclToTemplate(const Decl * D)216 const Decl *adjustDeclToTemplate(const Decl *D) {
217   if (const FunctionDecl *FD = dyn_cast<FunctionDecl>(D)) {
218     // Is this function declaration part of a function template?
219     if (const FunctionTemplateDecl *FTD = FD->getDescribedFunctionTemplate())
220       return FTD;
221 
222     // Nothing to do if function is not an implicit instantiation.
223     if (FD->getTemplateSpecializationKind() != TSK_ImplicitInstantiation)
224       return D;
225 
226     // Function is an implicit instantiation of a function template?
227     if (const FunctionTemplateDecl *FTD = FD->getPrimaryTemplate())
228       return FTD;
229 
230     // Function is instantiated from a member definition of a class template?
231     if (const FunctionDecl *MemberDecl =
232             FD->getInstantiatedFromMemberFunction())
233       return MemberDecl;
234 
235     return D;
236   }
237   if (const VarDecl *VD = dyn_cast<VarDecl>(D)) {
238     // Static data member is instantiated from a member definition of a class
239     // template?
240     if (VD->isStaticDataMember())
241       if (const VarDecl *MemberDecl = VD->getInstantiatedFromStaticDataMember())
242         return MemberDecl;
243 
244     return D;
245   }
246   if (const CXXRecordDecl *CRD = dyn_cast<CXXRecordDecl>(D)) {
247     // Is this class declaration part of a class template?
248     if (const ClassTemplateDecl *CTD = CRD->getDescribedClassTemplate())
249       return CTD;
250 
251     // Class is an implicit instantiation of a class template or partial
252     // specialization?
253     if (const ClassTemplateSpecializationDecl *CTSD =
254             dyn_cast<ClassTemplateSpecializationDecl>(CRD)) {
255       if (CTSD->getSpecializationKind() != TSK_ImplicitInstantiation)
256         return D;
257       llvm::PointerUnion<ClassTemplateDecl *,
258                          ClassTemplatePartialSpecializationDecl *>
259           PU = CTSD->getSpecializedTemplateOrPartial();
260       return PU.is<ClassTemplateDecl*>() ?
261           static_cast<const Decl*>(PU.get<ClassTemplateDecl *>()) :
262           static_cast<const Decl*>(
263               PU.get<ClassTemplatePartialSpecializationDecl *>());
264     }
265 
266     // Class is instantiated from a member definition of a class template?
267     if (const MemberSpecializationInfo *Info =
268                    CRD->getMemberSpecializationInfo())
269       return Info->getInstantiatedFrom();
270 
271     return D;
272   }
273   if (const EnumDecl *ED = dyn_cast<EnumDecl>(D)) {
274     // Enum is instantiated from a member definition of a class template?
275     if (const EnumDecl *MemberDecl = ED->getInstantiatedFromMemberEnum())
276       return MemberDecl;
277 
278     return D;
279   }
280   // FIXME: Adjust alias templates?
281   return D;
282 }
283 } // unnamed namespace
284 
getRawCommentForAnyRedecl(const Decl * D,const Decl ** OriginalDecl) const285 const RawComment *ASTContext::getRawCommentForAnyRedecl(
286                                                 const Decl *D,
287                                                 const Decl **OriginalDecl) const {
288   D = adjustDeclToTemplate(D);
289 
290   // Check whether we have cached a comment for this declaration already.
291   {
292     llvm::DenseMap<const Decl *, RawCommentAndCacheFlags>::iterator Pos =
293         RedeclComments.find(D);
294     if (Pos != RedeclComments.end()) {
295       const RawCommentAndCacheFlags &Raw = Pos->second;
296       if (Raw.getKind() != RawCommentAndCacheFlags::NoCommentInDecl) {
297         if (OriginalDecl)
298           *OriginalDecl = Raw.getOriginalDecl();
299         return Raw.getRaw();
300       }
301     }
302   }
303 
304   // Search for comments attached to declarations in the redeclaration chain.
305   const RawComment *RC = NULL;
306   const Decl *OriginalDeclForRC = NULL;
307   for (Decl::redecl_iterator I = D->redecls_begin(),
308                              E = D->redecls_end();
309        I != E; ++I) {
310     llvm::DenseMap<const Decl *, RawCommentAndCacheFlags>::iterator Pos =
311         RedeclComments.find(*I);
312     if (Pos != RedeclComments.end()) {
313       const RawCommentAndCacheFlags &Raw = Pos->second;
314       if (Raw.getKind() != RawCommentAndCacheFlags::NoCommentInDecl) {
315         RC = Raw.getRaw();
316         OriginalDeclForRC = Raw.getOriginalDecl();
317         break;
318       }
319     } else {
320       RC = getRawCommentForDeclNoCache(*I);
321       OriginalDeclForRC = *I;
322       RawCommentAndCacheFlags Raw;
323       if (RC) {
324         Raw.setRaw(RC);
325         Raw.setKind(RawCommentAndCacheFlags::FromDecl);
326       } else
327         Raw.setKind(RawCommentAndCacheFlags::NoCommentInDecl);
328       Raw.setOriginalDecl(*I);
329       RedeclComments[*I] = Raw;
330       if (RC)
331         break;
332     }
333   }
334 
335   // If we found a comment, it should be a documentation comment.
336   assert(!RC || RC->isDocumentation());
337 
338   if (OriginalDecl)
339     *OriginalDecl = OriginalDeclForRC;
340 
341   // Update cache for every declaration in the redeclaration chain.
342   RawCommentAndCacheFlags Raw;
343   Raw.setRaw(RC);
344   Raw.setKind(RawCommentAndCacheFlags::FromRedecl);
345   Raw.setOriginalDecl(OriginalDeclForRC);
346 
347   for (Decl::redecl_iterator I = D->redecls_begin(),
348                              E = D->redecls_end();
349        I != E; ++I) {
350     RawCommentAndCacheFlags &R = RedeclComments[*I];
351     if (R.getKind() == RawCommentAndCacheFlags::NoCommentInDecl)
352       R = Raw;
353   }
354 
355   return RC;
356 }
357 
getCommentForDecl(const Decl * D) const358 comments::FullComment *ASTContext::getCommentForDecl(const Decl *D) const {
359   D = adjustDeclToTemplate(D);
360   const Decl *Canonical = D->getCanonicalDecl();
361   llvm::DenseMap<const Decl *, comments::FullComment *>::iterator Pos =
362       ParsedComments.find(Canonical);
363   if (Pos != ParsedComments.end())
364     return Pos->second;
365 
366   const Decl *OriginalDecl;
367   const RawComment *RC = getRawCommentForAnyRedecl(D, &OriginalDecl);
368   if (!RC)
369     return NULL;
370 
371   // If the RawComment was attached to other redeclaration of this Decl, we
372   // should parse the comment in context of that other Decl.  This is important
373   // because comments can contain references to parameter names which can be
374   // different across redeclarations.
375   if (D != OriginalDecl)
376     return getCommentForDecl(OriginalDecl);
377 
378   comments::FullComment *FC = RC->parse(*this, D);
379   ParsedComments[Canonical] = FC;
380   return FC;
381 }
382 
383 void
Profile(llvm::FoldingSetNodeID & ID,TemplateTemplateParmDecl * Parm)384 ASTContext::CanonicalTemplateTemplateParm::Profile(llvm::FoldingSetNodeID &ID,
385                                                TemplateTemplateParmDecl *Parm) {
386   ID.AddInteger(Parm->getDepth());
387   ID.AddInteger(Parm->getPosition());
388   ID.AddBoolean(Parm->isParameterPack());
389 
390   TemplateParameterList *Params = Parm->getTemplateParameters();
391   ID.AddInteger(Params->size());
392   for (TemplateParameterList::const_iterator P = Params->begin(),
393                                           PEnd = Params->end();
394        P != PEnd; ++P) {
395     if (TemplateTypeParmDecl *TTP = dyn_cast<TemplateTypeParmDecl>(*P)) {
396       ID.AddInteger(0);
397       ID.AddBoolean(TTP->isParameterPack());
398       continue;
399     }
400 
401     if (NonTypeTemplateParmDecl *NTTP = dyn_cast<NonTypeTemplateParmDecl>(*P)) {
402       ID.AddInteger(1);
403       ID.AddBoolean(NTTP->isParameterPack());
404       ID.AddPointer(NTTP->getType().getCanonicalType().getAsOpaquePtr());
405       if (NTTP->isExpandedParameterPack()) {
406         ID.AddBoolean(true);
407         ID.AddInteger(NTTP->getNumExpansionTypes());
408         for (unsigned I = 0, N = NTTP->getNumExpansionTypes(); I != N; ++I) {
409           QualType T = NTTP->getExpansionType(I);
410           ID.AddPointer(T.getCanonicalType().getAsOpaquePtr());
411         }
412       } else
413         ID.AddBoolean(false);
414       continue;
415     }
416 
417     TemplateTemplateParmDecl *TTP = cast<TemplateTemplateParmDecl>(*P);
418     ID.AddInteger(2);
419     Profile(ID, TTP);
420   }
421 }
422 
423 TemplateTemplateParmDecl *
getCanonicalTemplateTemplateParmDecl(TemplateTemplateParmDecl * TTP) const424 ASTContext::getCanonicalTemplateTemplateParmDecl(
425                                           TemplateTemplateParmDecl *TTP) const {
426   // Check if we already have a canonical template template parameter.
427   llvm::FoldingSetNodeID ID;
428   CanonicalTemplateTemplateParm::Profile(ID, TTP);
429   void *InsertPos = 0;
430   CanonicalTemplateTemplateParm *Canonical
431     = CanonTemplateTemplateParms.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos);
432   if (Canonical)
433     return Canonical->getParam();
434 
435   // Build a canonical template parameter list.
436   TemplateParameterList *Params = TTP->getTemplateParameters();
437   SmallVector<NamedDecl *, 4> CanonParams;
438   CanonParams.reserve(Params->size());
439   for (TemplateParameterList::const_iterator P = Params->begin(),
440                                           PEnd = Params->end();
441        P != PEnd; ++P) {
442     if (TemplateTypeParmDecl *TTP = dyn_cast<TemplateTypeParmDecl>(*P))
443       CanonParams.push_back(
444                   TemplateTypeParmDecl::Create(*this, getTranslationUnitDecl(),
445                                                SourceLocation(),
446                                                SourceLocation(),
447                                                TTP->getDepth(),
448                                                TTP->getIndex(), 0, false,
449                                                TTP->isParameterPack()));
450     else if (NonTypeTemplateParmDecl *NTTP
451              = dyn_cast<NonTypeTemplateParmDecl>(*P)) {
452       QualType T = getCanonicalType(NTTP->getType());
453       TypeSourceInfo *TInfo = getTrivialTypeSourceInfo(T);
454       NonTypeTemplateParmDecl *Param;
455       if (NTTP->isExpandedParameterPack()) {
456         SmallVector<QualType, 2> ExpandedTypes;
457         SmallVector<TypeSourceInfo *, 2> ExpandedTInfos;
458         for (unsigned I = 0, N = NTTP->getNumExpansionTypes(); I != N; ++I) {
459           ExpandedTypes.push_back(getCanonicalType(NTTP->getExpansionType(I)));
460           ExpandedTInfos.push_back(
461                                 getTrivialTypeSourceInfo(ExpandedTypes.back()));
462         }
463 
464         Param = NonTypeTemplateParmDecl::Create(*this, getTranslationUnitDecl(),
465                                                 SourceLocation(),
466                                                 SourceLocation(),
467                                                 NTTP->getDepth(),
468                                                 NTTP->getPosition(), 0,
469                                                 T,
470                                                 TInfo,
471                                                 ExpandedTypes.data(),
472                                                 ExpandedTypes.size(),
473                                                 ExpandedTInfos.data());
474       } else {
475         Param = NonTypeTemplateParmDecl::Create(*this, getTranslationUnitDecl(),
476                                                 SourceLocation(),
477                                                 SourceLocation(),
478                                                 NTTP->getDepth(),
479                                                 NTTP->getPosition(), 0,
480                                                 T,
481                                                 NTTP->isParameterPack(),
482                                                 TInfo);
483       }
484       CanonParams.push_back(Param);
485 
486     } else
487       CanonParams.push_back(getCanonicalTemplateTemplateParmDecl(
488                                            cast<TemplateTemplateParmDecl>(*P)));
489   }
490 
491   TemplateTemplateParmDecl *CanonTTP
492     = TemplateTemplateParmDecl::Create(*this, getTranslationUnitDecl(),
493                                        SourceLocation(), TTP->getDepth(),
494                                        TTP->getPosition(),
495                                        TTP->isParameterPack(),
496                                        0,
497                          TemplateParameterList::Create(*this, SourceLocation(),
498                                                        SourceLocation(),
499                                                        CanonParams.data(),
500                                                        CanonParams.size(),
501                                                        SourceLocation()));
502 
503   // Get the new insert position for the node we care about.
504   Canonical = CanonTemplateTemplateParms.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos);
505   assert(Canonical == 0 && "Shouldn't be in the map!");
506   (void)Canonical;
507 
508   // Create the canonical template template parameter entry.
509   Canonical = new (*this) CanonicalTemplateTemplateParm(CanonTTP);
510   CanonTemplateTemplateParms.InsertNode(Canonical, InsertPos);
511   return CanonTTP;
512 }
513 
createCXXABI(const TargetInfo & T)514 CXXABI *ASTContext::createCXXABI(const TargetInfo &T) {
515   if (!LangOpts.CPlusPlus) return 0;
516 
517   switch (T.getCXXABI()) {
518   case CXXABI_ARM:
519     return CreateARMCXXABI(*this);
520   case CXXABI_Itanium:
521     return CreateItaniumCXXABI(*this);
522   case CXXABI_Microsoft:
523     return CreateMicrosoftCXXABI(*this);
524   }
525   llvm_unreachable("Invalid CXXABI type!");
526 }
527 
getAddressSpaceMap(const TargetInfo & T,const LangOptions & LOpts)528 static const LangAS::Map *getAddressSpaceMap(const TargetInfo &T,
529                                              const LangOptions &LOpts) {
530   if (LOpts.FakeAddressSpaceMap) {
531     // The fake address space map must have a distinct entry for each
532     // language-specific address space.
533     static const unsigned FakeAddrSpaceMap[] = {
534       1, // opencl_global
535       2, // opencl_local
536       3, // opencl_constant
537       4, // cuda_device
538       5, // cuda_constant
539       6  // cuda_shared
540     };
541     return &FakeAddrSpaceMap;
542   } else {
543     return &T.getAddressSpaceMap();
544   }
545 }
546 
ASTContext(LangOptions & LOpts,SourceManager & SM,const TargetInfo * t,IdentifierTable & idents,SelectorTable & sels,Builtin::Context & builtins,unsigned size_reserve,bool DelayInitialization)547 ASTContext::ASTContext(LangOptions& LOpts, SourceManager &SM,
548                        const TargetInfo *t,
549                        IdentifierTable &idents, SelectorTable &sels,
550                        Builtin::Context &builtins,
551                        unsigned size_reserve,
552                        bool DelayInitialization)
553   : FunctionProtoTypes(this_()),
554     TemplateSpecializationTypes(this_()),
555     DependentTemplateSpecializationTypes(this_()),
556     SubstTemplateTemplateParmPacks(this_()),
557     GlobalNestedNameSpecifier(0),
558     Int128Decl(0), UInt128Decl(0),
559     BuiltinVaListDecl(0),
560     ObjCIdDecl(0), ObjCSelDecl(0), ObjCClassDecl(0), ObjCProtocolClassDecl(0),
561     BOOLDecl(0),
562     CFConstantStringTypeDecl(0), ObjCInstanceTypeDecl(0),
563     FILEDecl(0),
564     jmp_bufDecl(0), sigjmp_bufDecl(0), ucontext_tDecl(0),
565     BlockDescriptorType(0), BlockDescriptorExtendedType(0),
566     cudaConfigureCallDecl(0),
567     NullTypeSourceInfo(QualType()),
568     FirstLocalImport(), LastLocalImport(),
569     SourceMgr(SM), LangOpts(LOpts),
570     AddrSpaceMap(0), Target(t), PrintingPolicy(LOpts),
571     Idents(idents), Selectors(sels),
572     BuiltinInfo(builtins),
573     DeclarationNames(*this),
574     ExternalSource(0), Listener(0),
575     Comments(SM), CommentsLoaded(false),
576     CommentCommandTraits(BumpAlloc),
577     LastSDM(0, 0),
578     UniqueBlockByRefTypeID(0)
579 {
580   if (size_reserve > 0) Types.reserve(size_reserve);
581   TUDecl = TranslationUnitDecl::Create(*this);
582 
583   if (!DelayInitialization) {
584     assert(t && "No target supplied for ASTContext initialization");
585     InitBuiltinTypes(*t);
586   }
587 }
588 
~ASTContext()589 ASTContext::~ASTContext() {
590   // Release the DenseMaps associated with DeclContext objects.
591   // FIXME: Is this the ideal solution?
592   ReleaseDeclContextMaps();
593 
594   // Call all of the deallocation functions.
595   for (unsigned I = 0, N = Deallocations.size(); I != N; ++I)
596     Deallocations[I].first(Deallocations[I].second);
597 
598   // ASTRecordLayout objects in ASTRecordLayouts must always be destroyed
599   // because they can contain DenseMaps.
600   for (llvm::DenseMap<const ObjCContainerDecl*,
601        const ASTRecordLayout*>::iterator
602        I = ObjCLayouts.begin(), E = ObjCLayouts.end(); I != E; )
603     // Increment in loop to prevent using deallocated memory.
604     if (ASTRecordLayout *R = const_cast<ASTRecordLayout*>((I++)->second))
605       R->Destroy(*this);
606 
607   for (llvm::DenseMap<const RecordDecl*, const ASTRecordLayout*>::iterator
608        I = ASTRecordLayouts.begin(), E = ASTRecordLayouts.end(); I != E; ) {
609     // Increment in loop to prevent using deallocated memory.
610     if (ASTRecordLayout *R = const_cast<ASTRecordLayout*>((I++)->second))
611       R->Destroy(*this);
612   }
613 
614   for (llvm::DenseMap<const Decl*, AttrVec*>::iterator A = DeclAttrs.begin(),
615                                                     AEnd = DeclAttrs.end();
616        A != AEnd; ++A)
617     A->second->~AttrVec();
618 }
619 
AddDeallocation(void (* Callback)(void *),void * Data)620 void ASTContext::AddDeallocation(void (*Callback)(void*), void *Data) {
621   Deallocations.push_back(std::make_pair(Callback, Data));
622 }
623 
624 void
setExternalSource(OwningPtr<ExternalASTSource> & Source)625 ASTContext::setExternalSource(OwningPtr<ExternalASTSource> &Source) {
626   ExternalSource.reset(Source.take());
627 }
628 
PrintStats() const629 void ASTContext::PrintStats() const {
630   llvm::errs() << "\n*** AST Context Stats:\n";
631   llvm::errs() << "  " << Types.size() << " types total.\n";
632 
633   unsigned counts[] = {
634 #define TYPE(Name, Parent) 0,
635 #define ABSTRACT_TYPE(Name, Parent)
636 #include "clang/AST/TypeNodes.def"
637     0 // Extra
638   };
639 
640   for (unsigned i = 0, e = Types.size(); i != e; ++i) {
641     Type *T = Types[i];
642     counts[(unsigned)T->getTypeClass()]++;
643   }
644 
645   unsigned Idx = 0;
646   unsigned TotalBytes = 0;
647 #define TYPE(Name, Parent)                                              \
648   if (counts[Idx])                                                      \
649     llvm::errs() << "    " << counts[Idx] << " " << #Name               \
650                  << " types\n";                                         \
651   TotalBytes += counts[Idx] * sizeof(Name##Type);                       \
652   ++Idx;
653 #define ABSTRACT_TYPE(Name, Parent)
654 #include "clang/AST/TypeNodes.def"
655 
656   llvm::errs() << "Total bytes = " << TotalBytes << "\n";
657 
658   // Implicit special member functions.
659   llvm::errs() << NumImplicitDefaultConstructorsDeclared << "/"
660                << NumImplicitDefaultConstructors
661                << " implicit default constructors created\n";
662   llvm::errs() << NumImplicitCopyConstructorsDeclared << "/"
663                << NumImplicitCopyConstructors
664                << " implicit copy constructors created\n";
665   if (getLangOpts().CPlusPlus)
666     llvm::errs() << NumImplicitMoveConstructorsDeclared << "/"
667                  << NumImplicitMoveConstructors
668                  << " implicit move constructors created\n";
669   llvm::errs() << NumImplicitCopyAssignmentOperatorsDeclared << "/"
670                << NumImplicitCopyAssignmentOperators
671                << " implicit copy assignment operators created\n";
672   if (getLangOpts().CPlusPlus)
673     llvm::errs() << NumImplicitMoveAssignmentOperatorsDeclared << "/"
674                  << NumImplicitMoveAssignmentOperators
675                  << " implicit move assignment operators created\n";
676   llvm::errs() << NumImplicitDestructorsDeclared << "/"
677                << NumImplicitDestructors
678                << " implicit destructors created\n";
679 
680   if (ExternalSource.get()) {
681     llvm::errs() << "\n";
682     ExternalSource->PrintStats();
683   }
684 
685   BumpAlloc.PrintStats();
686 }
687 
getInt128Decl() const688 TypedefDecl *ASTContext::getInt128Decl() const {
689   if (!Int128Decl) {
690     TypeSourceInfo *TInfo = getTrivialTypeSourceInfo(Int128Ty);
691     Int128Decl = TypedefDecl::Create(const_cast<ASTContext &>(*this),
692                                      getTranslationUnitDecl(),
693                                      SourceLocation(),
694                                      SourceLocation(),
695                                      &Idents.get("__int128_t"),
696                                      TInfo);
697   }
698 
699   return Int128Decl;
700 }
701 
getUInt128Decl() const702 TypedefDecl *ASTContext::getUInt128Decl() const {
703   if (!UInt128Decl) {
704     TypeSourceInfo *TInfo = getTrivialTypeSourceInfo(UnsignedInt128Ty);
705     UInt128Decl = TypedefDecl::Create(const_cast<ASTContext &>(*this),
706                                      getTranslationUnitDecl(),
707                                      SourceLocation(),
708                                      SourceLocation(),
709                                      &Idents.get("__uint128_t"),
710                                      TInfo);
711   }
712 
713   return UInt128Decl;
714 }
715 
InitBuiltinType(CanQualType & R,BuiltinType::Kind K)716 void ASTContext::InitBuiltinType(CanQualType &R, BuiltinType::Kind K) {
717   BuiltinType *Ty = new (*this, TypeAlignment) BuiltinType(K);
718   R = CanQualType::CreateUnsafe(QualType(Ty, 0));
719   Types.push_back(Ty);
720 }
721 
InitBuiltinTypes(const TargetInfo & Target)722 void ASTContext::InitBuiltinTypes(const TargetInfo &Target) {
723   assert((!this->Target || this->Target == &Target) &&
724          "Incorrect target reinitialization");
725   assert(VoidTy.isNull() && "Context reinitialized?");
726 
727   this->Target = &Target;
728 
729   ABI.reset(createCXXABI(Target));
730   AddrSpaceMap = getAddressSpaceMap(Target, LangOpts);
731 
732   // C99 6.2.5p19.
733   InitBuiltinType(VoidTy,              BuiltinType::Void);
734 
735   // C99 6.2.5p2.
736   InitBuiltinType(BoolTy,              BuiltinType::Bool);
737   // C99 6.2.5p3.
738   if (LangOpts.CharIsSigned)
739     InitBuiltinType(CharTy,            BuiltinType::Char_S);
740   else
741     InitBuiltinType(CharTy,            BuiltinType::Char_U);
742   // C99 6.2.5p4.
743   InitBuiltinType(SignedCharTy,        BuiltinType::SChar);
744   InitBuiltinType(ShortTy,             BuiltinType::Short);
745   InitBuiltinType(IntTy,               BuiltinType::Int);
746   InitBuiltinType(LongTy,              BuiltinType::Long);
747   InitBuiltinType(LongLongTy,          BuiltinType::LongLong);
748 
749   // C99 6.2.5p6.
750   InitBuiltinType(UnsignedCharTy,      BuiltinType::UChar);
751   InitBuiltinType(UnsignedShortTy,     BuiltinType::UShort);
752   InitBuiltinType(UnsignedIntTy,       BuiltinType::UInt);
753   InitBuiltinType(UnsignedLongTy,      BuiltinType::ULong);
754   InitBuiltinType(UnsignedLongLongTy,  BuiltinType::ULongLong);
755 
756   // C99 6.2.5p10.
757   InitBuiltinType(FloatTy,             BuiltinType::Float);
758   InitBuiltinType(DoubleTy,            BuiltinType::Double);
759   InitBuiltinType(LongDoubleTy,        BuiltinType::LongDouble);
760 
761   // GNU extension, 128-bit integers.
762   InitBuiltinType(Int128Ty,            BuiltinType::Int128);
763   InitBuiltinType(UnsignedInt128Ty,    BuiltinType::UInt128);
764 
765   if (LangOpts.CPlusPlus && LangOpts.WChar) { // C++ 3.9.1p5
766     if (TargetInfo::isTypeSigned(Target.getWCharType()))
767       InitBuiltinType(WCharTy,           BuiltinType::WChar_S);
768     else  // -fshort-wchar makes wchar_t be unsigned.
769       InitBuiltinType(WCharTy,           BuiltinType::WChar_U);
770   } else // C99 (or C++ using -fno-wchar)
771     WCharTy = getFromTargetType(Target.getWCharType());
772 
773   WIntTy = getFromTargetType(Target.getWIntType());
774 
775   if (LangOpts.CPlusPlus) // C++0x 3.9.1p5, extension for C++
776     InitBuiltinType(Char16Ty,           BuiltinType::Char16);
777   else // C99
778     Char16Ty = getFromTargetType(Target.getChar16Type());
779 
780   if (LangOpts.CPlusPlus) // C++0x 3.9.1p5, extension for C++
781     InitBuiltinType(Char32Ty,           BuiltinType::Char32);
782   else // C99
783     Char32Ty = getFromTargetType(Target.getChar32Type());
784 
785   // Placeholder type for type-dependent expressions whose type is
786   // completely unknown. No code should ever check a type against
787   // DependentTy and users should never see it; however, it is here to
788   // help diagnose failures to properly check for type-dependent
789   // expressions.
790   InitBuiltinType(DependentTy,         BuiltinType::Dependent);
791 
792   // Placeholder type for functions.
793   InitBuiltinType(OverloadTy,          BuiltinType::Overload);
794 
795   // Placeholder type for bound members.
796   InitBuiltinType(BoundMemberTy,       BuiltinType::BoundMember);
797 
798   // Placeholder type for pseudo-objects.
799   InitBuiltinType(PseudoObjectTy,      BuiltinType::PseudoObject);
800 
801   // "any" type; useful for debugger-like clients.
802   InitBuiltinType(UnknownAnyTy,        BuiltinType::UnknownAny);
803 
804   // Placeholder type for unbridged ARC casts.
805   InitBuiltinType(ARCUnbridgedCastTy,  BuiltinType::ARCUnbridgedCast);
806 
807   // Placeholder type for builtin functions.
808   InitBuiltinType(BuiltinFnTy,  BuiltinType::BuiltinFn);
809 
810   // C99 6.2.5p11.
811   FloatComplexTy      = getComplexType(FloatTy);
812   DoubleComplexTy     = getComplexType(DoubleTy);
813   LongDoubleComplexTy = getComplexType(LongDoubleTy);
814 
815   // Builtin types for 'id', 'Class', and 'SEL'.
816   InitBuiltinType(ObjCBuiltinIdTy, BuiltinType::ObjCId);
817   InitBuiltinType(ObjCBuiltinClassTy, BuiltinType::ObjCClass);
818   InitBuiltinType(ObjCBuiltinSelTy, BuiltinType::ObjCSel);
819 
820   // Builtin type for __objc_yes and __objc_no
821   ObjCBuiltinBoolTy = (Target.useSignedCharForObjCBool() ?
822                        SignedCharTy : BoolTy);
823 
824   ObjCConstantStringType = QualType();
825 
826   // void * type
827   VoidPtrTy = getPointerType(VoidTy);
828 
829   // nullptr type (C++0x 2.14.7)
830   InitBuiltinType(NullPtrTy,           BuiltinType::NullPtr);
831 
832   // half type (OpenCL 6.1.1.1) / ARM NEON __fp16
833   InitBuiltinType(HalfTy, BuiltinType::Half);
834 
835   // Builtin type used to help define __builtin_va_list.
836   VaListTagTy = QualType();
837 }
838 
getDiagnostics() const839 DiagnosticsEngine &ASTContext::getDiagnostics() const {
840   return SourceMgr.getDiagnostics();
841 }
842 
getDeclAttrs(const Decl * D)843 AttrVec& ASTContext::getDeclAttrs(const Decl *D) {
844   AttrVec *&Result = DeclAttrs[D];
845   if (!Result) {
846     void *Mem = Allocate(sizeof(AttrVec));
847     Result = new (Mem) AttrVec;
848   }
849 
850   return *Result;
851 }
852 
853 /// \brief Erase the attributes corresponding to the given declaration.
eraseDeclAttrs(const Decl * D)854 void ASTContext::eraseDeclAttrs(const Decl *D) {
855   llvm::DenseMap<const Decl*, AttrVec*>::iterator Pos = DeclAttrs.find(D);
856   if (Pos != DeclAttrs.end()) {
857     Pos->second->~AttrVec();
858     DeclAttrs.erase(Pos);
859   }
860 }
861 
862 MemberSpecializationInfo *
getInstantiatedFromStaticDataMember(const VarDecl * Var)863 ASTContext::getInstantiatedFromStaticDataMember(const VarDecl *Var) {
864   assert(Var->isStaticDataMember() && "Not a static data member");
865   llvm::DenseMap<const VarDecl *, MemberSpecializationInfo *>::iterator Pos
866     = InstantiatedFromStaticDataMember.find(Var);
867   if (Pos == InstantiatedFromStaticDataMember.end())
868     return 0;
869 
870   return Pos->second;
871 }
872 
873 void
setInstantiatedFromStaticDataMember(VarDecl * Inst,VarDecl * Tmpl,TemplateSpecializationKind TSK,SourceLocation PointOfInstantiation)874 ASTContext::setInstantiatedFromStaticDataMember(VarDecl *Inst, VarDecl *Tmpl,
875                                                 TemplateSpecializationKind TSK,
876                                           SourceLocation PointOfInstantiation) {
877   assert(Inst->isStaticDataMember() && "Not a static data member");
878   assert(Tmpl->isStaticDataMember() && "Not a static data member");
879   assert(!InstantiatedFromStaticDataMember[Inst] &&
880          "Already noted what static data member was instantiated from");
881   InstantiatedFromStaticDataMember[Inst]
882     = new (*this) MemberSpecializationInfo(Tmpl, TSK, PointOfInstantiation);
883 }
884 
getClassScopeSpecializationPattern(const FunctionDecl * FD)885 FunctionDecl *ASTContext::getClassScopeSpecializationPattern(
886                                                      const FunctionDecl *FD){
887   assert(FD && "Specialization is 0");
888   llvm::DenseMap<const FunctionDecl*, FunctionDecl *>::const_iterator Pos
889     = ClassScopeSpecializationPattern.find(FD);
890   if (Pos == ClassScopeSpecializationPattern.end())
891     return 0;
892 
893   return Pos->second;
894 }
895 
setClassScopeSpecializationPattern(FunctionDecl * FD,FunctionDecl * Pattern)896 void ASTContext::setClassScopeSpecializationPattern(FunctionDecl *FD,
897                                         FunctionDecl *Pattern) {
898   assert(FD && "Specialization is 0");
899   assert(Pattern && "Class scope specialization pattern is 0");
900   ClassScopeSpecializationPattern[FD] = Pattern;
901 }
902 
903 NamedDecl *
getInstantiatedFromUsingDecl(UsingDecl * UUD)904 ASTContext::getInstantiatedFromUsingDecl(UsingDecl *UUD) {
905   llvm::DenseMap<UsingDecl *, NamedDecl *>::const_iterator Pos
906     = InstantiatedFromUsingDecl.find(UUD);
907   if (Pos == InstantiatedFromUsingDecl.end())
908     return 0;
909 
910   return Pos->second;
911 }
912 
913 void
setInstantiatedFromUsingDecl(UsingDecl * Inst,NamedDecl * Pattern)914 ASTContext::setInstantiatedFromUsingDecl(UsingDecl *Inst, NamedDecl *Pattern) {
915   assert((isa<UsingDecl>(Pattern) ||
916           isa<UnresolvedUsingValueDecl>(Pattern) ||
917           isa<UnresolvedUsingTypenameDecl>(Pattern)) &&
918          "pattern decl is not a using decl");
919   assert(!InstantiatedFromUsingDecl[Inst] && "pattern already exists");
920   InstantiatedFromUsingDecl[Inst] = Pattern;
921 }
922 
923 UsingShadowDecl *
getInstantiatedFromUsingShadowDecl(UsingShadowDecl * Inst)924 ASTContext::getInstantiatedFromUsingShadowDecl(UsingShadowDecl *Inst) {
925   llvm::DenseMap<UsingShadowDecl*, UsingShadowDecl*>::const_iterator Pos
926     = InstantiatedFromUsingShadowDecl.find(Inst);
927   if (Pos == InstantiatedFromUsingShadowDecl.end())
928     return 0;
929 
930   return Pos->second;
931 }
932 
933 void
setInstantiatedFromUsingShadowDecl(UsingShadowDecl * Inst,UsingShadowDecl * Pattern)934 ASTContext::setInstantiatedFromUsingShadowDecl(UsingShadowDecl *Inst,
935                                                UsingShadowDecl *Pattern) {
936   assert(!InstantiatedFromUsingShadowDecl[Inst] && "pattern already exists");
937   InstantiatedFromUsingShadowDecl[Inst] = Pattern;
938 }
939 
getInstantiatedFromUnnamedFieldDecl(FieldDecl * Field)940 FieldDecl *ASTContext::getInstantiatedFromUnnamedFieldDecl(FieldDecl *Field) {
941   llvm::DenseMap<FieldDecl *, FieldDecl *>::iterator Pos
942     = InstantiatedFromUnnamedFieldDecl.find(Field);
943   if (Pos == InstantiatedFromUnnamedFieldDecl.end())
944     return 0;
945 
946   return Pos->second;
947 }
948 
setInstantiatedFromUnnamedFieldDecl(FieldDecl * Inst,FieldDecl * Tmpl)949 void ASTContext::setInstantiatedFromUnnamedFieldDecl(FieldDecl *Inst,
950                                                      FieldDecl *Tmpl) {
951   assert(!Inst->getDeclName() && "Instantiated field decl is not unnamed");
952   assert(!Tmpl->getDeclName() && "Template field decl is not unnamed");
953   assert(!InstantiatedFromUnnamedFieldDecl[Inst] &&
954          "Already noted what unnamed field was instantiated from");
955 
956   InstantiatedFromUnnamedFieldDecl[Inst] = Tmpl;
957 }
958 
ZeroBitfieldFollowsNonBitfield(const FieldDecl * FD,const FieldDecl * LastFD) const959 bool ASTContext::ZeroBitfieldFollowsNonBitfield(const FieldDecl *FD,
960                                     const FieldDecl *LastFD) const {
961   return (FD->isBitField() && LastFD && !LastFD->isBitField() &&
962           FD->getBitWidthValue(*this) == 0);
963 }
964 
ZeroBitfieldFollowsBitfield(const FieldDecl * FD,const FieldDecl * LastFD) const965 bool ASTContext::ZeroBitfieldFollowsBitfield(const FieldDecl *FD,
966                                              const FieldDecl *LastFD) const {
967   return (FD->isBitField() && LastFD && LastFD->isBitField() &&
968           FD->getBitWidthValue(*this) == 0 &&
969           LastFD->getBitWidthValue(*this) != 0);
970 }
971 
BitfieldFollowsBitfield(const FieldDecl * FD,const FieldDecl * LastFD) const972 bool ASTContext::BitfieldFollowsBitfield(const FieldDecl *FD,
973                                          const FieldDecl *LastFD) const {
974   return (FD->isBitField() && LastFD && LastFD->isBitField() &&
975           FD->getBitWidthValue(*this) &&
976           LastFD->getBitWidthValue(*this));
977 }
978 
NonBitfieldFollowsBitfield(const FieldDecl * FD,const FieldDecl * LastFD) const979 bool ASTContext::NonBitfieldFollowsBitfield(const FieldDecl *FD,
980                                          const FieldDecl *LastFD) const {
981   return (!FD->isBitField() && LastFD && LastFD->isBitField() &&
982           LastFD->getBitWidthValue(*this));
983 }
984 
BitfieldFollowsNonBitfield(const FieldDecl * FD,const FieldDecl * LastFD) const985 bool ASTContext::BitfieldFollowsNonBitfield(const FieldDecl *FD,
986                                              const FieldDecl *LastFD) const {
987   return (FD->isBitField() && LastFD && !LastFD->isBitField() &&
988           FD->getBitWidthValue(*this));
989 }
990 
991 ASTContext::overridden_cxx_method_iterator
overridden_methods_begin(const CXXMethodDecl * Method) const992 ASTContext::overridden_methods_begin(const CXXMethodDecl *Method) const {
993   llvm::DenseMap<const CXXMethodDecl *, CXXMethodVector>::const_iterator Pos
994     = OverriddenMethods.find(Method);
995   if (Pos == OverriddenMethods.end())
996     return 0;
997 
998   return Pos->second.begin();
999 }
1000 
1001 ASTContext::overridden_cxx_method_iterator
overridden_methods_end(const CXXMethodDecl * Method) const1002 ASTContext::overridden_methods_end(const CXXMethodDecl *Method) const {
1003   llvm::DenseMap<const CXXMethodDecl *, CXXMethodVector>::const_iterator Pos
1004     = OverriddenMethods.find(Method);
1005   if (Pos == OverriddenMethods.end())
1006     return 0;
1007 
1008   return Pos->second.end();
1009 }
1010 
1011 unsigned
overridden_methods_size(const CXXMethodDecl * Method) const1012 ASTContext::overridden_methods_size(const CXXMethodDecl *Method) const {
1013   llvm::DenseMap<const CXXMethodDecl *, CXXMethodVector>::const_iterator Pos
1014     = OverriddenMethods.find(Method);
1015   if (Pos == OverriddenMethods.end())
1016     return 0;
1017 
1018   return Pos->second.size();
1019 }
1020 
addOverriddenMethod(const CXXMethodDecl * Method,const CXXMethodDecl * Overridden)1021 void ASTContext::addOverriddenMethod(const CXXMethodDecl *Method,
1022                                      const CXXMethodDecl *Overridden) {
1023   OverriddenMethods[Method].push_back(Overridden);
1024 }
1025 
addedLocalImportDecl(ImportDecl * Import)1026 void ASTContext::addedLocalImportDecl(ImportDecl *Import) {
1027   assert(!Import->NextLocalImport && "Import declaration already in the chain");
1028   assert(!Import->isFromASTFile() && "Non-local import declaration");
1029   if (!FirstLocalImport) {
1030     FirstLocalImport = Import;
1031     LastLocalImport = Import;
1032     return;
1033   }
1034 
1035   LastLocalImport->NextLocalImport = Import;
1036   LastLocalImport = Import;
1037 }
1038 
1039 //===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
1040 //                         Type Sizing and Analysis
1041 //===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
1042 
1043 /// getFloatTypeSemantics - Return the APFloat 'semantics' for the specified
1044 /// scalar floating point type.
getFloatTypeSemantics(QualType T) const1045 const llvm::fltSemantics &ASTContext::getFloatTypeSemantics(QualType T) const {
1046   const BuiltinType *BT = T->getAs<BuiltinType>();
1047   assert(BT && "Not a floating point type!");
1048   switch (BT->getKind()) {
1049   default: llvm_unreachable("Not a floating point type!");
1050   case BuiltinType::Half:       return Target->getHalfFormat();
1051   case BuiltinType::Float:      return Target->getFloatFormat();
1052   case BuiltinType::Double:     return Target->getDoubleFormat();
1053   case BuiltinType::LongDouble: return Target->getLongDoubleFormat();
1054   }
1055 }
1056 
1057 /// getDeclAlign - Return a conservative estimate of the alignment of the
1058 /// specified decl.  Note that bitfields do not have a valid alignment, so
1059 /// this method will assert on them.
1060 /// If @p RefAsPointee, references are treated like their underlying type
1061 /// (for alignof), else they're treated like pointers (for CodeGen).
getDeclAlign(const Decl * D,bool RefAsPointee) const1062 CharUnits ASTContext::getDeclAlign(const Decl *D, bool RefAsPointee) const {
1063   unsigned Align = Target->getCharWidth();
1064 
1065   bool UseAlignAttrOnly = false;
1066   if (unsigned AlignFromAttr = D->getMaxAlignment()) {
1067     Align = AlignFromAttr;
1068 
1069     // __attribute__((aligned)) can increase or decrease alignment
1070     // *except* on a struct or struct member, where it only increases
1071     // alignment unless 'packed' is also specified.
1072     //
1073     // It is an error for alignas to decrease alignment, so we can
1074     // ignore that possibility;  Sema should diagnose it.
1075     if (isa<FieldDecl>(D)) {
1076       UseAlignAttrOnly = D->hasAttr<PackedAttr>() ||
1077         cast<FieldDecl>(D)->getParent()->hasAttr<PackedAttr>();
1078     } else {
1079       UseAlignAttrOnly = true;
1080     }
1081   }
1082   else if (isa<FieldDecl>(D))
1083       UseAlignAttrOnly =
1084         D->hasAttr<PackedAttr>() ||
1085         cast<FieldDecl>(D)->getParent()->hasAttr<PackedAttr>();
1086 
1087   // If we're using the align attribute only, just ignore everything
1088   // else about the declaration and its type.
1089   if (UseAlignAttrOnly) {
1090     // do nothing
1091 
1092   } else if (const ValueDecl *VD = dyn_cast<ValueDecl>(D)) {
1093     QualType T = VD->getType();
1094     if (const ReferenceType* RT = T->getAs<ReferenceType>()) {
1095       if (RefAsPointee)
1096         T = RT->getPointeeType();
1097       else
1098         T = getPointerType(RT->getPointeeType());
1099     }
1100     if (!T->isIncompleteType() && !T->isFunctionType()) {
1101       // Adjust alignments of declarations with array type by the
1102       // large-array alignment on the target.
1103       unsigned MinWidth = Target->getLargeArrayMinWidth();
1104       const ArrayType *arrayType;
1105       if (MinWidth && (arrayType = getAsArrayType(T))) {
1106         if (isa<VariableArrayType>(arrayType))
1107           Align = std::max(Align, Target->getLargeArrayAlign());
1108         else if (isa<ConstantArrayType>(arrayType) &&
1109                  MinWidth <= getTypeSize(cast<ConstantArrayType>(arrayType)))
1110           Align = std::max(Align, Target->getLargeArrayAlign());
1111 
1112         // Walk through any array types while we're at it.
1113         T = getBaseElementType(arrayType);
1114       }
1115       Align = std::max(Align, getPreferredTypeAlign(T.getTypePtr()));
1116     }
1117 
1118     // Fields can be subject to extra alignment constraints, like if
1119     // the field is packed, the struct is packed, or the struct has a
1120     // a max-field-alignment constraint (#pragma pack).  So calculate
1121     // the actual alignment of the field within the struct, and then
1122     // (as we're expected to) constrain that by the alignment of the type.
1123     if (const FieldDecl *field = dyn_cast<FieldDecl>(VD)) {
1124       // So calculate the alignment of the field.
1125       const ASTRecordLayout &layout = getASTRecordLayout(field->getParent());
1126 
1127       // Start with the record's overall alignment.
1128       unsigned fieldAlign = toBits(layout.getAlignment());
1129 
1130       // Use the GCD of that and the offset within the record.
1131       uint64_t offset = layout.getFieldOffset(field->getFieldIndex());
1132       if (offset > 0) {
1133         // Alignment is always a power of 2, so the GCD will be a power of 2,
1134         // which means we get to do this crazy thing instead of Euclid's.
1135         uint64_t lowBitOfOffset = offset & (~offset + 1);
1136         if (lowBitOfOffset < fieldAlign)
1137           fieldAlign = static_cast<unsigned>(lowBitOfOffset);
1138       }
1139 
1140       Align = std::min(Align, fieldAlign);
1141     }
1142   }
1143 
1144   return toCharUnitsFromBits(Align);
1145 }
1146 
1147 // getTypeInfoDataSizeInChars - Return the size of a type, in
1148 // chars. If the type is a record, its data size is returned.  This is
1149 // the size of the memcpy that's performed when assigning this type
1150 // using a trivial copy/move assignment operator.
1151 std::pair<CharUnits, CharUnits>
getTypeInfoDataSizeInChars(QualType T) const1152 ASTContext::getTypeInfoDataSizeInChars(QualType T) const {
1153   std::pair<CharUnits, CharUnits> sizeAndAlign = getTypeInfoInChars(T);
1154 
1155   // In C++, objects can sometimes be allocated into the tail padding
1156   // of a base-class subobject.  We decide whether that's possible
1157   // during class layout, so here we can just trust the layout results.
1158   if (getLangOpts().CPlusPlus) {
1159     if (const RecordType *RT = T->getAs<RecordType>()) {
1160       const ASTRecordLayout &layout = getASTRecordLayout(RT->getDecl());
1161       sizeAndAlign.first = layout.getDataSize();
1162     }
1163   }
1164 
1165   return sizeAndAlign;
1166 }
1167 
1168 std::pair<CharUnits, CharUnits>
getTypeInfoInChars(const Type * T) const1169 ASTContext::getTypeInfoInChars(const Type *T) const {
1170   std::pair<uint64_t, unsigned> Info = getTypeInfo(T);
1171   return std::make_pair(toCharUnitsFromBits(Info.first),
1172                         toCharUnitsFromBits(Info.second));
1173 }
1174 
1175 std::pair<CharUnits, CharUnits>
getTypeInfoInChars(QualType T) const1176 ASTContext::getTypeInfoInChars(QualType T) const {
1177   return getTypeInfoInChars(T.getTypePtr());
1178 }
1179 
getTypeInfo(const Type * T) const1180 std::pair<uint64_t, unsigned> ASTContext::getTypeInfo(const Type *T) const {
1181   TypeInfoMap::iterator it = MemoizedTypeInfo.find(T);
1182   if (it != MemoizedTypeInfo.end())
1183     return it->second;
1184 
1185   std::pair<uint64_t, unsigned> Info = getTypeInfoImpl(T);
1186   MemoizedTypeInfo.insert(std::make_pair(T, Info));
1187   return Info;
1188 }
1189 
1190 /// getTypeInfoImpl - Return the size of the specified type, in bits.  This
1191 /// method does not work on incomplete types.
1192 ///
1193 /// FIXME: Pointers into different addr spaces could have different sizes and
1194 /// alignment requirements: getPointerInfo should take an AddrSpace, this
1195 /// should take a QualType, &c.
1196 std::pair<uint64_t, unsigned>
getTypeInfoImpl(const Type * T) const1197 ASTContext::getTypeInfoImpl(const Type *T) const {
1198   uint64_t Width=0;
1199   unsigned Align=8;
1200   switch (T->getTypeClass()) {
1201 #define TYPE(Class, Base)
1202 #define ABSTRACT_TYPE(Class, Base)
1203 #define NON_CANONICAL_TYPE(Class, Base)
1204 #define DEPENDENT_TYPE(Class, Base) case Type::Class:
1205 #include "clang/AST/TypeNodes.def"
1206     llvm_unreachable("Should not see dependent types");
1207 
1208   case Type::FunctionNoProto:
1209   case Type::FunctionProto:
1210     // GCC extension: alignof(function) = 32 bits
1211     Width = 0;
1212     Align = 32;
1213     break;
1214 
1215   case Type::IncompleteArray:
1216   case Type::VariableArray:
1217     Width = 0;
1218     Align = getTypeAlign(cast<ArrayType>(T)->getElementType());
1219     break;
1220 
1221   case Type::ConstantArray: {
1222     const ConstantArrayType *CAT = cast<ConstantArrayType>(T);
1223 
1224     std::pair<uint64_t, unsigned> EltInfo = getTypeInfo(CAT->getElementType());
1225     uint64_t Size = CAT->getSize().getZExtValue();
1226     assert((Size == 0 || EltInfo.first <= (uint64_t)(-1)/Size) &&
1227            "Overflow in array type bit size evaluation");
1228     Width = EltInfo.first*Size;
1229     Align = EltInfo.second;
1230     Width = llvm::RoundUpToAlignment(Width, Align);
1231     break;
1232   }
1233   case Type::ExtVector:
1234   case Type::Vector: {
1235     const VectorType *VT = cast<VectorType>(T);
1236     std::pair<uint64_t, unsigned> EltInfo = getTypeInfo(VT->getElementType());
1237     Width = EltInfo.first*VT->getNumElements();
1238     Align = Width;
1239     // If the alignment is not a power of 2, round up to the next power of 2.
1240     // This happens for non-power-of-2 length vectors.
1241     if (Align & (Align-1)) {
1242       Align = llvm::NextPowerOf2(Align);
1243       Width = llvm::RoundUpToAlignment(Width, Align);
1244     }
1245     // Adjust the alignment based on the target max.
1246     uint64_t TargetVectorAlign = Target->getMaxVectorAlign();
1247     if (TargetVectorAlign && TargetVectorAlign < Align)
1248       Align = TargetVectorAlign;
1249     break;
1250   }
1251 
1252   case Type::Builtin:
1253     switch (cast<BuiltinType>(T)->getKind()) {
1254     default: llvm_unreachable("Unknown builtin type!");
1255     case BuiltinType::Void:
1256       // GCC extension: alignof(void) = 8 bits.
1257       Width = 0;
1258       Align = 8;
1259       break;
1260 
1261     case BuiltinType::Bool:
1262       Width = Target->getBoolWidth();
1263       Align = Target->getBoolAlign();
1264       break;
1265     case BuiltinType::Char_S:
1266     case BuiltinType::Char_U:
1267     case BuiltinType::UChar:
1268     case BuiltinType::SChar:
1269       Width = Target->getCharWidth();
1270       Align = Target->getCharAlign();
1271       break;
1272     case BuiltinType::WChar_S:
1273     case BuiltinType::WChar_U:
1274       Width = Target->getWCharWidth();
1275       Align = Target->getWCharAlign();
1276       break;
1277     case BuiltinType::Char16:
1278       Width = Target->getChar16Width();
1279       Align = Target->getChar16Align();
1280       break;
1281     case BuiltinType::Char32:
1282       Width = Target->getChar32Width();
1283       Align = Target->getChar32Align();
1284       break;
1285     case BuiltinType::UShort:
1286     case BuiltinType::Short:
1287       Width = Target->getShortWidth();
1288       Align = Target->getShortAlign();
1289       break;
1290     case BuiltinType::UInt:
1291     case BuiltinType::Int:
1292       Width = Target->getIntWidth();
1293       Align = Target->getIntAlign();
1294       break;
1295     case BuiltinType::ULong:
1296     case BuiltinType::Long:
1297       Width = Target->getLongWidth();
1298       Align = Target->getLongAlign();
1299       break;
1300     case BuiltinType::ULongLong:
1301     case BuiltinType::LongLong:
1302       Width = Target->getLongLongWidth();
1303       Align = Target->getLongLongAlign();
1304       break;
1305     case BuiltinType::Int128:
1306     case BuiltinType::UInt128:
1307       Width = 128;
1308       Align = 128; // int128_t is 128-bit aligned on all targets.
1309       break;
1310     case BuiltinType::Half:
1311       Width = Target->getHalfWidth();
1312       Align = Target->getHalfAlign();
1313       break;
1314     case BuiltinType::Float:
1315       Width = Target->getFloatWidth();
1316       Align = Target->getFloatAlign();
1317       break;
1318     case BuiltinType::Double:
1319       Width = Target->getDoubleWidth();
1320       Align = Target->getDoubleAlign();
1321       break;
1322     case BuiltinType::LongDouble:
1323       Width = Target->getLongDoubleWidth();
1324       Align = Target->getLongDoubleAlign();
1325       break;
1326     case BuiltinType::NullPtr:
1327       Width = Target->getPointerWidth(0); // C++ 3.9.1p11: sizeof(nullptr_t)
1328       Align = Target->getPointerAlign(0); //   == sizeof(void*)
1329       break;
1330     case BuiltinType::ObjCId:
1331     case BuiltinType::ObjCClass:
1332     case BuiltinType::ObjCSel:
1333       Width = Target->getPointerWidth(0);
1334       Align = Target->getPointerAlign(0);
1335       break;
1336     }
1337     break;
1338   case Type::ObjCObjectPointer:
1339     Width = Target->getPointerWidth(0);
1340     Align = Target->getPointerAlign(0);
1341     break;
1342   case Type::BlockPointer: {
1343     unsigned AS = getTargetAddressSpace(
1344         cast<BlockPointerType>(T)->getPointeeType());
1345     Width = Target->getPointerWidth(AS);
1346     Align = Target->getPointerAlign(AS);
1347     break;
1348   }
1349   case Type::LValueReference:
1350   case Type::RValueReference: {
1351     // alignof and sizeof should never enter this code path here, so we go
1352     // the pointer route.
1353     unsigned AS = getTargetAddressSpace(
1354         cast<ReferenceType>(T)->getPointeeType());
1355     Width = Target->getPointerWidth(AS);
1356     Align = Target->getPointerAlign(AS);
1357     break;
1358   }
1359   case Type::Pointer: {
1360     unsigned AS = getTargetAddressSpace(cast<PointerType>(T)->getPointeeType());
1361     Width = Target->getPointerWidth(AS);
1362     Align = Target->getPointerAlign(AS);
1363     break;
1364   }
1365   case Type::MemberPointer: {
1366     const MemberPointerType *MPT = cast<MemberPointerType>(T);
1367     std::pair<uint64_t, unsigned> PtrDiffInfo =
1368       getTypeInfo(getPointerDiffType());
1369     Width = PtrDiffInfo.first * ABI->getMemberPointerSize(MPT);
1370     Align = PtrDiffInfo.second;
1371     break;
1372   }
1373   case Type::Complex: {
1374     // Complex types have the same alignment as their elements, but twice the
1375     // size.
1376     std::pair<uint64_t, unsigned> EltInfo =
1377       getTypeInfo(cast<ComplexType>(T)->getElementType());
1378     Width = EltInfo.first*2;
1379     Align = EltInfo.second;
1380     break;
1381   }
1382   case Type::ObjCObject:
1383     return getTypeInfo(cast<ObjCObjectType>(T)->getBaseType().getTypePtr());
1384   case Type::ObjCInterface: {
1385     const ObjCInterfaceType *ObjCI = cast<ObjCInterfaceType>(T);
1386     const ASTRecordLayout &Layout = getASTObjCInterfaceLayout(ObjCI->getDecl());
1387     Width = toBits(Layout.getSize());
1388     Align = toBits(Layout.getAlignment());
1389     break;
1390   }
1391   case Type::Record:
1392   case Type::Enum: {
1393     const TagType *TT = cast<TagType>(T);
1394 
1395     if (TT->getDecl()->isInvalidDecl()) {
1396       Width = 8;
1397       Align = 8;
1398       break;
1399     }
1400 
1401     if (const EnumType *ET = dyn_cast<EnumType>(TT))
1402       return getTypeInfo(ET->getDecl()->getIntegerType());
1403 
1404     const RecordType *RT = cast<RecordType>(TT);
1405     const ASTRecordLayout &Layout = getASTRecordLayout(RT->getDecl());
1406     Width = toBits(Layout.getSize());
1407     Align = toBits(Layout.getAlignment());
1408     break;
1409   }
1410 
1411   case Type::SubstTemplateTypeParm:
1412     return getTypeInfo(cast<SubstTemplateTypeParmType>(T)->
1413                        getReplacementType().getTypePtr());
1414 
1415   case Type::Auto: {
1416     const AutoType *A = cast<AutoType>(T);
1417     assert(A->isDeduced() && "Cannot request the size of a dependent type");
1418     return getTypeInfo(A->getDeducedType().getTypePtr());
1419   }
1420 
1421   case Type::Paren:
1422     return getTypeInfo(cast<ParenType>(T)->getInnerType().getTypePtr());
1423 
1424   case Type::Typedef: {
1425     const TypedefNameDecl *Typedef = cast<TypedefType>(T)->getDecl();
1426     std::pair<uint64_t, unsigned> Info
1427       = getTypeInfo(Typedef->getUnderlyingType().getTypePtr());
1428     // If the typedef has an aligned attribute on it, it overrides any computed
1429     // alignment we have.  This violates the GCC documentation (which says that
1430     // attribute(aligned) can only round up) but matches its implementation.
1431     if (unsigned AttrAlign = Typedef->getMaxAlignment())
1432       Align = AttrAlign;
1433     else
1434       Align = Info.second;
1435     Width = Info.first;
1436     break;
1437   }
1438 
1439   case Type::TypeOfExpr:
1440     return getTypeInfo(cast<TypeOfExprType>(T)->getUnderlyingExpr()->getType()
1441                          .getTypePtr());
1442 
1443   case Type::TypeOf:
1444     return getTypeInfo(cast<TypeOfType>(T)->getUnderlyingType().getTypePtr());
1445 
1446   case Type::Decltype:
1447     return getTypeInfo(cast<DecltypeType>(T)->getUnderlyingExpr()->getType()
1448                         .getTypePtr());
1449 
1450   case Type::UnaryTransform:
1451     return getTypeInfo(cast<UnaryTransformType>(T)->getUnderlyingType());
1452 
1453   case Type::Elaborated:
1454     return getTypeInfo(cast<ElaboratedType>(T)->getNamedType().getTypePtr());
1455 
1456   case Type::Attributed:
1457     return getTypeInfo(
1458                   cast<AttributedType>(T)->getEquivalentType().getTypePtr());
1459 
1460   case Type::TemplateSpecialization: {
1461     assert(getCanonicalType(T) != T &&
1462            "Cannot request the size of a dependent type");
1463     const TemplateSpecializationType *TST = cast<TemplateSpecializationType>(T);
1464     // A type alias template specialization may refer to a typedef with the
1465     // aligned attribute on it.
1466     if (TST->isTypeAlias())
1467       return getTypeInfo(TST->getAliasedType().getTypePtr());
1468     else
1469       return getTypeInfo(getCanonicalType(T));
1470   }
1471 
1472   case Type::Atomic: {
1473     std::pair<uint64_t, unsigned> Info
1474       = getTypeInfo(cast<AtomicType>(T)->getValueType());
1475     Width = Info.first;
1476     Align = Info.second;
1477     if (Width != 0 && Width <= Target->getMaxAtomicPromoteWidth() &&
1478         llvm::isPowerOf2_64(Width)) {
1479       // We can potentially perform lock-free atomic operations for this
1480       // type; promote the alignment appropriately.
1481       // FIXME: We could potentially promote the width here as well...
1482       // is that worthwhile?  (Non-struct atomic types generally have
1483       // power-of-two size anyway, but structs might not.  Requires a bit
1484       // of implementation work to make sure we zero out the extra bits.)
1485       Align = static_cast<unsigned>(Width);
1486     }
1487   }
1488 
1489   }
1490 
1491   assert(llvm::isPowerOf2_32(Align) && "Alignment must be power of 2");
1492   return std::make_pair(Width, Align);
1493 }
1494 
1495 /// toCharUnitsFromBits - Convert a size in bits to a size in characters.
toCharUnitsFromBits(int64_t BitSize) const1496 CharUnits ASTContext::toCharUnitsFromBits(int64_t BitSize) const {
1497   return CharUnits::fromQuantity(BitSize / getCharWidth());
1498 }
1499 
1500 /// toBits - Convert a size in characters to a size in characters.
toBits(CharUnits CharSize) const1501 int64_t ASTContext::toBits(CharUnits CharSize) const {
1502   return CharSize.getQuantity() * getCharWidth();
1503 }
1504 
1505 /// getTypeSizeInChars - Return the size of the specified type, in characters.
1506 /// This method does not work on incomplete types.
getTypeSizeInChars(QualType T) const1507 CharUnits ASTContext::getTypeSizeInChars(QualType T) const {
1508   return toCharUnitsFromBits(getTypeSize(T));
1509 }
getTypeSizeInChars(const Type * T) const1510 CharUnits ASTContext::getTypeSizeInChars(const Type *T) const {
1511   return toCharUnitsFromBits(getTypeSize(T));
1512 }
1513 
1514 /// getTypeAlignInChars - Return the ABI-specified alignment of a type, in
1515 /// characters. This method does not work on incomplete types.
getTypeAlignInChars(QualType T) const1516 CharUnits ASTContext::getTypeAlignInChars(QualType T) const {
1517   return toCharUnitsFromBits(getTypeAlign(T));
1518 }
getTypeAlignInChars(const Type * T) const1519 CharUnits ASTContext::getTypeAlignInChars(const Type *T) const {
1520   return toCharUnitsFromBits(getTypeAlign(T));
1521 }
1522 
1523 /// getPreferredTypeAlign - Return the "preferred" alignment of the specified
1524 /// type for the current target in bits.  This can be different than the ABI
1525 /// alignment in cases where it is beneficial for performance to overalign
1526 /// a data type.
getPreferredTypeAlign(const Type * T) const1527 unsigned ASTContext::getPreferredTypeAlign(const Type *T) const {
1528   unsigned ABIAlign = getTypeAlign(T);
1529 
1530   // Double and long long should be naturally aligned if possible.
1531   if (const ComplexType* CT = T->getAs<ComplexType>())
1532     T = CT->getElementType().getTypePtr();
1533   if (T->isSpecificBuiltinType(BuiltinType::Double) ||
1534       T->isSpecificBuiltinType(BuiltinType::LongLong) ||
1535       T->isSpecificBuiltinType(BuiltinType::ULongLong))
1536     return std::max(ABIAlign, (unsigned)getTypeSize(T));
1537 
1538   return ABIAlign;
1539 }
1540 
1541 /// DeepCollectObjCIvars -
1542 /// This routine first collects all declared, but not synthesized, ivars in
1543 /// super class and then collects all ivars, including those synthesized for
1544 /// current class. This routine is used for implementation of current class
1545 /// when all ivars, declared and synthesized are known.
1546 ///
DeepCollectObjCIvars(const ObjCInterfaceDecl * OI,bool leafClass,SmallVectorImpl<const ObjCIvarDecl * > & Ivars) const1547 void ASTContext::DeepCollectObjCIvars(const ObjCInterfaceDecl *OI,
1548                                       bool leafClass,
1549                             SmallVectorImpl<const ObjCIvarDecl*> &Ivars) const {
1550   if (const ObjCInterfaceDecl *SuperClass = OI->getSuperClass())
1551     DeepCollectObjCIvars(SuperClass, false, Ivars);
1552   if (!leafClass) {
1553     for (ObjCInterfaceDecl::ivar_iterator I = OI->ivar_begin(),
1554          E = OI->ivar_end(); I != E; ++I)
1555       Ivars.push_back(*I);
1556   } else {
1557     ObjCInterfaceDecl *IDecl = const_cast<ObjCInterfaceDecl *>(OI);
1558     for (const ObjCIvarDecl *Iv = IDecl->all_declared_ivar_begin(); Iv;
1559          Iv= Iv->getNextIvar())
1560       Ivars.push_back(Iv);
1561   }
1562 }
1563 
1564 /// CollectInheritedProtocols - Collect all protocols in current class and
1565 /// those inherited by it.
CollectInheritedProtocols(const Decl * CDecl,llvm::SmallPtrSet<ObjCProtocolDecl *,8> & Protocols)1566 void ASTContext::CollectInheritedProtocols(const Decl *CDecl,
1567                           llvm::SmallPtrSet<ObjCProtocolDecl*, 8> &Protocols) {
1568   if (const ObjCInterfaceDecl *OI = dyn_cast<ObjCInterfaceDecl>(CDecl)) {
1569     // We can use protocol_iterator here instead of
1570     // all_referenced_protocol_iterator since we are walking all categories.
1571     for (ObjCInterfaceDecl::all_protocol_iterator P = OI->all_referenced_protocol_begin(),
1572          PE = OI->all_referenced_protocol_end(); P != PE; ++P) {
1573       ObjCProtocolDecl *Proto = (*P);
1574       Protocols.insert(Proto->getCanonicalDecl());
1575       for (ObjCProtocolDecl::protocol_iterator P = Proto->protocol_begin(),
1576            PE = Proto->protocol_end(); P != PE; ++P) {
1577         Protocols.insert((*P)->getCanonicalDecl());
1578         CollectInheritedProtocols(*P, Protocols);
1579       }
1580     }
1581 
1582     // Categories of this Interface.
1583     for (const ObjCCategoryDecl *CDeclChain = OI->getCategoryList();
1584          CDeclChain; CDeclChain = CDeclChain->getNextClassCategory())
1585       CollectInheritedProtocols(CDeclChain, Protocols);
1586     if (ObjCInterfaceDecl *SD = OI->getSuperClass())
1587       while (SD) {
1588         CollectInheritedProtocols(SD, Protocols);
1589         SD = SD->getSuperClass();
1590       }
1591   } else if (const ObjCCategoryDecl *OC = dyn_cast<ObjCCategoryDecl>(CDecl)) {
1592     for (ObjCCategoryDecl::protocol_iterator P = OC->protocol_begin(),
1593          PE = OC->protocol_end(); P != PE; ++P) {
1594       ObjCProtocolDecl *Proto = (*P);
1595       Protocols.insert(Proto->getCanonicalDecl());
1596       for (ObjCProtocolDecl::protocol_iterator P = Proto->protocol_begin(),
1597            PE = Proto->protocol_end(); P != PE; ++P)
1598         CollectInheritedProtocols(*P, Protocols);
1599     }
1600   } else if (const ObjCProtocolDecl *OP = dyn_cast<ObjCProtocolDecl>(CDecl)) {
1601     for (ObjCProtocolDecl::protocol_iterator P = OP->protocol_begin(),
1602          PE = OP->protocol_end(); P != PE; ++P) {
1603       ObjCProtocolDecl *Proto = (*P);
1604       Protocols.insert(Proto->getCanonicalDecl());
1605       for (ObjCProtocolDecl::protocol_iterator P = Proto->protocol_begin(),
1606            PE = Proto->protocol_end(); P != PE; ++P)
1607         CollectInheritedProtocols(*P, Protocols);
1608     }
1609   }
1610 }
1611 
CountNonClassIvars(const ObjCInterfaceDecl * OI) const1612 unsigned ASTContext::CountNonClassIvars(const ObjCInterfaceDecl *OI) const {
1613   unsigned count = 0;
1614   // Count ivars declared in class extension.
1615   for (const ObjCCategoryDecl *CDecl = OI->getFirstClassExtension(); CDecl;
1616        CDecl = CDecl->getNextClassExtension())
1617     count += CDecl->ivar_size();
1618 
1619   // Count ivar defined in this class's implementation.  This
1620   // includes synthesized ivars.
1621   if (ObjCImplementationDecl *ImplDecl = OI->getImplementation())
1622     count += ImplDecl->ivar_size();
1623 
1624   return count;
1625 }
1626 
isSentinelNullExpr(const Expr * E)1627 bool ASTContext::isSentinelNullExpr(const Expr *E) {
1628   if (!E)
1629     return false;
1630 
1631   // nullptr_t is always treated as null.
1632   if (E->getType()->isNullPtrType()) return true;
1633 
1634   if (E->getType()->isAnyPointerType() &&
1635       E->IgnoreParenCasts()->isNullPointerConstant(*this,
1636                                                 Expr::NPC_ValueDependentIsNull))
1637     return true;
1638 
1639   // Unfortunately, __null has type 'int'.
1640   if (isa<GNUNullExpr>(E)) return true;
1641 
1642   return false;
1643 }
1644 
1645 /// \brief Get the implementation of ObjCInterfaceDecl,or NULL if none exists.
getObjCImplementation(ObjCInterfaceDecl * D)1646 ObjCImplementationDecl *ASTContext::getObjCImplementation(ObjCInterfaceDecl *D) {
1647   llvm::DenseMap<ObjCContainerDecl*, ObjCImplDecl*>::iterator
1648     I = ObjCImpls.find(D);
1649   if (I != ObjCImpls.end())
1650     return cast<ObjCImplementationDecl>(I->second);
1651   return 0;
1652 }
1653 /// \brief Get the implementation of ObjCCategoryDecl, or NULL if none exists.
getObjCImplementation(ObjCCategoryDecl * D)1654 ObjCCategoryImplDecl *ASTContext::getObjCImplementation(ObjCCategoryDecl *D) {
1655   llvm::DenseMap<ObjCContainerDecl*, ObjCImplDecl*>::iterator
1656     I = ObjCImpls.find(D);
1657   if (I != ObjCImpls.end())
1658     return cast<ObjCCategoryImplDecl>(I->second);
1659   return 0;
1660 }
1661 
1662 /// \brief Set the implementation of ObjCInterfaceDecl.
setObjCImplementation(ObjCInterfaceDecl * IFaceD,ObjCImplementationDecl * ImplD)1663 void ASTContext::setObjCImplementation(ObjCInterfaceDecl *IFaceD,
1664                            ObjCImplementationDecl *ImplD) {
1665   assert(IFaceD && ImplD && "Passed null params");
1666   ObjCImpls[IFaceD] = ImplD;
1667 }
1668 /// \brief Set the implementation of ObjCCategoryDecl.
setObjCImplementation(ObjCCategoryDecl * CatD,ObjCCategoryImplDecl * ImplD)1669 void ASTContext::setObjCImplementation(ObjCCategoryDecl *CatD,
1670                            ObjCCategoryImplDecl *ImplD) {
1671   assert(CatD && ImplD && "Passed null params");
1672   ObjCImpls[CatD] = ImplD;
1673 }
1674 
getObjContainingInterface(NamedDecl * ND) const1675 ObjCInterfaceDecl *ASTContext::getObjContainingInterface(NamedDecl *ND) const {
1676   if (ObjCInterfaceDecl *ID = dyn_cast<ObjCInterfaceDecl>(ND->getDeclContext()))
1677     return ID;
1678   if (ObjCCategoryDecl *CD = dyn_cast<ObjCCategoryDecl>(ND->getDeclContext()))
1679     return CD->getClassInterface();
1680   if (ObjCImplDecl *IMD = dyn_cast<ObjCImplDecl>(ND->getDeclContext()))
1681     return IMD->getClassInterface();
1682 
1683   return 0;
1684 }
1685 
1686 /// \brief Get the copy initialization expression of VarDecl,or NULL if
1687 /// none exists.
getBlockVarCopyInits(const VarDecl * VD)1688 Expr *ASTContext::getBlockVarCopyInits(const VarDecl*VD) {
1689   assert(VD && "Passed null params");
1690   assert(VD->hasAttr<BlocksAttr>() &&
1691          "getBlockVarCopyInits - not __block var");
1692   llvm::DenseMap<const VarDecl*, Expr*>::iterator
1693     I = BlockVarCopyInits.find(VD);
1694   return (I != BlockVarCopyInits.end()) ? cast<Expr>(I->second) : 0;
1695 }
1696 
1697 /// \brief Set the copy inialization expression of a block var decl.
setBlockVarCopyInits(VarDecl * VD,Expr * Init)1698 void ASTContext::setBlockVarCopyInits(VarDecl*VD, Expr* Init) {
1699   assert(VD && Init && "Passed null params");
1700   assert(VD->hasAttr<BlocksAttr>() &&
1701          "setBlockVarCopyInits - not __block var");
1702   BlockVarCopyInits[VD] = Init;
1703 }
1704 
CreateTypeSourceInfo(QualType T,unsigned DataSize) const1705 TypeSourceInfo *ASTContext::CreateTypeSourceInfo(QualType T,
1706                                                  unsigned DataSize) const {
1707   if (!DataSize)
1708     DataSize = TypeLoc::getFullDataSizeForType(T);
1709   else
1710     assert(DataSize == TypeLoc::getFullDataSizeForType(T) &&
1711            "incorrect data size provided to CreateTypeSourceInfo!");
1712 
1713   TypeSourceInfo *TInfo =
1714     (TypeSourceInfo*)BumpAlloc.Allocate(sizeof(TypeSourceInfo) + DataSize, 8);
1715   new (TInfo) TypeSourceInfo(T);
1716   return TInfo;
1717 }
1718 
getTrivialTypeSourceInfo(QualType T,SourceLocation L) const1719 TypeSourceInfo *ASTContext::getTrivialTypeSourceInfo(QualType T,
1720                                                      SourceLocation L) const {
1721   TypeSourceInfo *DI = CreateTypeSourceInfo(T);
1722   DI->getTypeLoc().initialize(const_cast<ASTContext &>(*this), L);
1723   return DI;
1724 }
1725 
1726 const ASTRecordLayout &
getASTObjCInterfaceLayout(const ObjCInterfaceDecl * D) const1727 ASTContext::getASTObjCInterfaceLayout(const ObjCInterfaceDecl *D) const {
1728   return getObjCLayout(D, 0);
1729 }
1730 
1731 const ASTRecordLayout &
getASTObjCImplementationLayout(const ObjCImplementationDecl * D) const1732 ASTContext::getASTObjCImplementationLayout(
1733                                         const ObjCImplementationDecl *D) const {
1734   return getObjCLayout(D->getClassInterface(), D);
1735 }
1736 
1737 //===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
1738 //                   Type creation/memoization methods
1739 //===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
1740 
1741 QualType
getExtQualType(const Type * baseType,Qualifiers quals) const1742 ASTContext::getExtQualType(const Type *baseType, Qualifiers quals) const {
1743   unsigned fastQuals = quals.getFastQualifiers();
1744   quals.removeFastQualifiers();
1745 
1746   // Check if we've already instantiated this type.
1747   llvm::FoldingSetNodeID ID;
1748   ExtQuals::Profile(ID, baseType, quals);
1749   void *insertPos = 0;
1750   if (ExtQuals *eq = ExtQualNodes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, insertPos)) {
1751     assert(eq->getQualifiers() == quals);
1752     return QualType(eq, fastQuals);
1753   }
1754 
1755   // If the base type is not canonical, make the appropriate canonical type.
1756   QualType canon;
1757   if (!baseType->isCanonicalUnqualified()) {
1758     SplitQualType canonSplit = baseType->getCanonicalTypeInternal().split();
1759     canonSplit.Quals.addConsistentQualifiers(quals);
1760     canon = getExtQualType(canonSplit.Ty, canonSplit.Quals);
1761 
1762     // Re-find the insert position.
1763     (void) ExtQualNodes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, insertPos);
1764   }
1765 
1766   ExtQuals *eq = new (*this, TypeAlignment) ExtQuals(baseType, canon, quals);
1767   ExtQualNodes.InsertNode(eq, insertPos);
1768   return QualType(eq, fastQuals);
1769 }
1770 
1771 QualType
getAddrSpaceQualType(QualType T,unsigned AddressSpace) const1772 ASTContext::getAddrSpaceQualType(QualType T, unsigned AddressSpace) const {
1773   QualType CanT = getCanonicalType(T);
1774   if (CanT.getAddressSpace() == AddressSpace)
1775     return T;
1776 
1777   // If we are composing extended qualifiers together, merge together
1778   // into one ExtQuals node.
1779   QualifierCollector Quals;
1780   const Type *TypeNode = Quals.strip(T);
1781 
1782   // If this type already has an address space specified, it cannot get
1783   // another one.
1784   assert(!Quals.hasAddressSpace() &&
1785          "Type cannot be in multiple addr spaces!");
1786   Quals.addAddressSpace(AddressSpace);
1787 
1788   return getExtQualType(TypeNode, Quals);
1789 }
1790 
getObjCGCQualType(QualType T,Qualifiers::GC GCAttr) const1791 QualType ASTContext::getObjCGCQualType(QualType T,
1792                                        Qualifiers::GC GCAttr) const {
1793   QualType CanT = getCanonicalType(T);
1794   if (CanT.getObjCGCAttr() == GCAttr)
1795     return T;
1796 
1797   if (const PointerType *ptr = T->getAs<PointerType>()) {
1798     QualType Pointee = ptr->getPointeeType();
1799     if (Pointee->isAnyPointerType()) {
1800       QualType ResultType = getObjCGCQualType(Pointee, GCAttr);
1801       return getPointerType(ResultType);
1802     }
1803   }
1804 
1805   // If we are composing extended qualifiers together, merge together
1806   // into one ExtQuals node.
1807   QualifierCollector Quals;
1808   const Type *TypeNode = Quals.strip(T);
1809 
1810   // If this type already has an ObjCGC specified, it cannot get
1811   // another one.
1812   assert(!Quals.hasObjCGCAttr() &&
1813          "Type cannot have multiple ObjCGCs!");
1814   Quals.addObjCGCAttr(GCAttr);
1815 
1816   return getExtQualType(TypeNode, Quals);
1817 }
1818 
adjustFunctionType(const FunctionType * T,FunctionType::ExtInfo Info)1819 const FunctionType *ASTContext::adjustFunctionType(const FunctionType *T,
1820                                                    FunctionType::ExtInfo Info) {
1821   if (T->getExtInfo() == Info)
1822     return T;
1823 
1824   QualType Result;
1825   if (const FunctionNoProtoType *FNPT = dyn_cast<FunctionNoProtoType>(T)) {
1826     Result = getFunctionNoProtoType(FNPT->getResultType(), Info);
1827   } else {
1828     const FunctionProtoType *FPT = cast<FunctionProtoType>(T);
1829     FunctionProtoType::ExtProtoInfo EPI = FPT->getExtProtoInfo();
1830     EPI.ExtInfo = Info;
1831     Result = getFunctionType(FPT->getResultType(), FPT->arg_type_begin(),
1832                              FPT->getNumArgs(), EPI);
1833   }
1834 
1835   return cast<FunctionType>(Result.getTypePtr());
1836 }
1837 
1838 /// getComplexType - Return the uniqued reference to the type for a complex
1839 /// number with the specified element type.
getComplexType(QualType T) const1840 QualType ASTContext::getComplexType(QualType T) const {
1841   // Unique pointers, to guarantee there is only one pointer of a particular
1842   // structure.
1843   llvm::FoldingSetNodeID ID;
1844   ComplexType::Profile(ID, T);
1845 
1846   void *InsertPos = 0;
1847   if (ComplexType *CT = ComplexTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos))
1848     return QualType(CT, 0);
1849 
1850   // If the pointee type isn't canonical, this won't be a canonical type either,
1851   // so fill in the canonical type field.
1852   QualType Canonical;
1853   if (!T.isCanonical()) {
1854     Canonical = getComplexType(getCanonicalType(T));
1855 
1856     // Get the new insert position for the node we care about.
1857     ComplexType *NewIP = ComplexTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos);
1858     assert(NewIP == 0 && "Shouldn't be in the map!"); (void)NewIP;
1859   }
1860   ComplexType *New = new (*this, TypeAlignment) ComplexType(T, Canonical);
1861   Types.push_back(New);
1862   ComplexTypes.InsertNode(New, InsertPos);
1863   return QualType(New, 0);
1864 }
1865 
1866 /// getPointerType - Return the uniqued reference to the type for a pointer to
1867 /// the specified type.
getPointerType(QualType T) const1868 QualType ASTContext::getPointerType(QualType T) const {
1869   // Unique pointers, to guarantee there is only one pointer of a particular
1870   // structure.
1871   llvm::FoldingSetNodeID ID;
1872   PointerType::Profile(ID, T);
1873 
1874   void *InsertPos = 0;
1875   if (PointerType *PT = PointerTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos))
1876     return QualType(PT, 0);
1877 
1878   // If the pointee type isn't canonical, this won't be a canonical type either,
1879   // so fill in the canonical type field.
1880   QualType Canonical;
1881   if (!T.isCanonical()) {
1882     Canonical = getPointerType(getCanonicalType(T));
1883 
1884     // Get the new insert position for the node we care about.
1885     PointerType *NewIP = PointerTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos);
1886     assert(NewIP == 0 && "Shouldn't be in the map!"); (void)NewIP;
1887   }
1888   PointerType *New = new (*this, TypeAlignment) PointerType(T, Canonical);
1889   Types.push_back(New);
1890   PointerTypes.InsertNode(New, InsertPos);
1891   return QualType(New, 0);
1892 }
1893 
1894 /// getBlockPointerType - Return the uniqued reference to the type for
1895 /// a pointer to the specified block.
getBlockPointerType(QualType T) const1896 QualType ASTContext::getBlockPointerType(QualType T) const {
1897   assert(T->isFunctionType() && "block of function types only");
1898   // Unique pointers, to guarantee there is only one block of a particular
1899   // structure.
1900   llvm::FoldingSetNodeID ID;
1901   BlockPointerType::Profile(ID, T);
1902 
1903   void *InsertPos = 0;
1904   if (BlockPointerType *PT =
1905         BlockPointerTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos))
1906     return QualType(PT, 0);
1907 
1908   // If the block pointee type isn't canonical, this won't be a canonical
1909   // type either so fill in the canonical type field.
1910   QualType Canonical;
1911   if (!T.isCanonical()) {
1912     Canonical = getBlockPointerType(getCanonicalType(T));
1913 
1914     // Get the new insert position for the node we care about.
1915     BlockPointerType *NewIP =
1916       BlockPointerTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos);
1917     assert(NewIP == 0 && "Shouldn't be in the map!"); (void)NewIP;
1918   }
1919   BlockPointerType *New
1920     = new (*this, TypeAlignment) BlockPointerType(T, Canonical);
1921   Types.push_back(New);
1922   BlockPointerTypes.InsertNode(New, InsertPos);
1923   return QualType(New, 0);
1924 }
1925 
1926 /// getLValueReferenceType - Return the uniqued reference to the type for an
1927 /// lvalue reference to the specified type.
1928 QualType
getLValueReferenceType(QualType T,bool SpelledAsLValue) const1929 ASTContext::getLValueReferenceType(QualType T, bool SpelledAsLValue) const {
1930   assert(getCanonicalType(T) != OverloadTy &&
1931          "Unresolved overloaded function type");
1932 
1933   // Unique pointers, to guarantee there is only one pointer of a particular
1934   // structure.
1935   llvm::FoldingSetNodeID ID;
1936   ReferenceType::Profile(ID, T, SpelledAsLValue);
1937 
1938   void *InsertPos = 0;
1939   if (LValueReferenceType *RT =
1940         LValueReferenceTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos))
1941     return QualType(RT, 0);
1942 
1943   const ReferenceType *InnerRef = T->getAs<ReferenceType>();
1944 
1945   // If the referencee type isn't canonical, this won't be a canonical type
1946   // either, so fill in the canonical type field.
1947   QualType Canonical;
1948   if (!SpelledAsLValue || InnerRef || !T.isCanonical()) {
1949     QualType PointeeType = (InnerRef ? InnerRef->getPointeeType() : T);
1950     Canonical = getLValueReferenceType(getCanonicalType(PointeeType));
1951 
1952     // Get the new insert position for the node we care about.
1953     LValueReferenceType *NewIP =
1954       LValueReferenceTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos);
1955     assert(NewIP == 0 && "Shouldn't be in the map!"); (void)NewIP;
1956   }
1957 
1958   LValueReferenceType *New
1959     = new (*this, TypeAlignment) LValueReferenceType(T, Canonical,
1960                                                      SpelledAsLValue);
1961   Types.push_back(New);
1962   LValueReferenceTypes.InsertNode(New, InsertPos);
1963 
1964   return QualType(New, 0);
1965 }
1966 
1967 /// getRValueReferenceType - Return the uniqued reference to the type for an
1968 /// rvalue reference to the specified type.
getRValueReferenceType(QualType T) const1969 QualType ASTContext::getRValueReferenceType(QualType T) const {
1970   // Unique pointers, to guarantee there is only one pointer of a particular
1971   // structure.
1972   llvm::FoldingSetNodeID ID;
1973   ReferenceType::Profile(ID, T, false);
1974 
1975   void *InsertPos = 0;
1976   if (RValueReferenceType *RT =
1977         RValueReferenceTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos))
1978     return QualType(RT, 0);
1979 
1980   const ReferenceType *InnerRef = T->getAs<ReferenceType>();
1981 
1982   // If the referencee type isn't canonical, this won't be a canonical type
1983   // either, so fill in the canonical type field.
1984   QualType Canonical;
1985   if (InnerRef || !T.isCanonical()) {
1986     QualType PointeeType = (InnerRef ? InnerRef->getPointeeType() : T);
1987     Canonical = getRValueReferenceType(getCanonicalType(PointeeType));
1988 
1989     // Get the new insert position for the node we care about.
1990     RValueReferenceType *NewIP =
1991       RValueReferenceTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos);
1992     assert(NewIP == 0 && "Shouldn't be in the map!"); (void)NewIP;
1993   }
1994 
1995   RValueReferenceType *New
1996     = new (*this, TypeAlignment) RValueReferenceType(T, Canonical);
1997   Types.push_back(New);
1998   RValueReferenceTypes.InsertNode(New, InsertPos);
1999   return QualType(New, 0);
2000 }
2001 
2002 /// getMemberPointerType - Return the uniqued reference to the type for a
2003 /// member pointer to the specified type, in the specified class.
getMemberPointerType(QualType T,const Type * Cls) const2004 QualType ASTContext::getMemberPointerType(QualType T, const Type *Cls) const {
2005   // Unique pointers, to guarantee there is only one pointer of a particular
2006   // structure.
2007   llvm::FoldingSetNodeID ID;
2008   MemberPointerType::Profile(ID, T, Cls);
2009 
2010   void *InsertPos = 0;
2011   if (MemberPointerType *PT =
2012       MemberPointerTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos))
2013     return QualType(PT, 0);
2014 
2015   // If the pointee or class type isn't canonical, this won't be a canonical
2016   // type either, so fill in the canonical type field.
2017   QualType Canonical;
2018   if (!T.isCanonical() || !Cls->isCanonicalUnqualified()) {
2019     Canonical = getMemberPointerType(getCanonicalType(T),getCanonicalType(Cls));
2020 
2021     // Get the new insert position for the node we care about.
2022     MemberPointerType *NewIP =
2023       MemberPointerTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos);
2024     assert(NewIP == 0 && "Shouldn't be in the map!"); (void)NewIP;
2025   }
2026   MemberPointerType *New
2027     = new (*this, TypeAlignment) MemberPointerType(T, Cls, Canonical);
2028   Types.push_back(New);
2029   MemberPointerTypes.InsertNode(New, InsertPos);
2030   return QualType(New, 0);
2031 }
2032 
2033 /// getConstantArrayType - Return the unique reference to the type for an
2034 /// array of the specified element type.
getConstantArrayType(QualType EltTy,const llvm::APInt & ArySizeIn,ArrayType::ArraySizeModifier ASM,unsigned IndexTypeQuals) const2035 QualType ASTContext::getConstantArrayType(QualType EltTy,
2036                                           const llvm::APInt &ArySizeIn,
2037                                           ArrayType::ArraySizeModifier ASM,
2038                                           unsigned IndexTypeQuals) const {
2039   assert((EltTy->isDependentType() ||
2040           EltTy->isIncompleteType() || EltTy->isConstantSizeType()) &&
2041          "Constant array of VLAs is illegal!");
2042 
2043   // Convert the array size into a canonical width matching the pointer size for
2044   // the target.
2045   llvm::APInt ArySize(ArySizeIn);
2046   ArySize =
2047     ArySize.zextOrTrunc(Target->getPointerWidth(getTargetAddressSpace(EltTy)));
2048 
2049   llvm::FoldingSetNodeID ID;
2050   ConstantArrayType::Profile(ID, EltTy, ArySize, ASM, IndexTypeQuals);
2051 
2052   void *InsertPos = 0;
2053   if (ConstantArrayType *ATP =
2054       ConstantArrayTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos))
2055     return QualType(ATP, 0);
2056 
2057   // If the element type isn't canonical or has qualifiers, this won't
2058   // be a canonical type either, so fill in the canonical type field.
2059   QualType Canon;
2060   if (!EltTy.isCanonical() || EltTy.hasLocalQualifiers()) {
2061     SplitQualType canonSplit = getCanonicalType(EltTy).split();
2062     Canon = getConstantArrayType(QualType(canonSplit.Ty, 0), ArySize,
2063                                  ASM, IndexTypeQuals);
2064     Canon = getQualifiedType(Canon, canonSplit.Quals);
2065 
2066     // Get the new insert position for the node we care about.
2067     ConstantArrayType *NewIP =
2068       ConstantArrayTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos);
2069     assert(NewIP == 0 && "Shouldn't be in the map!"); (void)NewIP;
2070   }
2071 
2072   ConstantArrayType *New = new(*this,TypeAlignment)
2073     ConstantArrayType(EltTy, Canon, ArySize, ASM, IndexTypeQuals);
2074   ConstantArrayTypes.InsertNode(New, InsertPos);
2075   Types.push_back(New);
2076   return QualType(New, 0);
2077 }
2078 
2079 /// getVariableArrayDecayedType - Turns the given type, which may be
2080 /// variably-modified, into the corresponding type with all the known
2081 /// sizes replaced with [*].
getVariableArrayDecayedType(QualType type) const2082 QualType ASTContext::getVariableArrayDecayedType(QualType type) const {
2083   // Vastly most common case.
2084   if (!type->isVariablyModifiedType()) return type;
2085 
2086   QualType result;
2087 
2088   SplitQualType split = type.getSplitDesugaredType();
2089   const Type *ty = split.Ty;
2090   switch (ty->getTypeClass()) {
2091 #define TYPE(Class, Base)
2092 #define ABSTRACT_TYPE(Class, Base)
2093 #define NON_CANONICAL_TYPE(Class, Base) case Type::Class:
2094 #include "clang/AST/TypeNodes.def"
2095     llvm_unreachable("didn't desugar past all non-canonical types?");
2096 
2097   // These types should never be variably-modified.
2098   case Type::Builtin:
2099   case Type::Complex:
2100   case Type::Vector:
2101   case Type::ExtVector:
2102   case Type::DependentSizedExtVector:
2103   case Type::ObjCObject:
2104   case Type::ObjCInterface:
2105   case Type::ObjCObjectPointer:
2106   case Type::Record:
2107   case Type::Enum:
2108   case Type::UnresolvedUsing:
2109   case Type::TypeOfExpr:
2110   case Type::TypeOf:
2111   case Type::Decltype:
2112   case Type::UnaryTransform:
2113   case Type::DependentName:
2114   case Type::InjectedClassName:
2115   case Type::TemplateSpecialization:
2116   case Type::DependentTemplateSpecialization:
2117   case Type::TemplateTypeParm:
2118   case Type::SubstTemplateTypeParmPack:
2119   case Type::Auto:
2120   case Type::PackExpansion:
2121     llvm_unreachable("type should never be variably-modified");
2122 
2123   // These types can be variably-modified but should never need to
2124   // further decay.
2125   case Type::FunctionNoProto:
2126   case Type::FunctionProto:
2127   case Type::BlockPointer:
2128   case Type::MemberPointer:
2129     return type;
2130 
2131   // These types can be variably-modified.  All these modifications
2132   // preserve structure except as noted by comments.
2133   // TODO: if we ever care about optimizing VLAs, there are no-op
2134   // optimizations available here.
2135   case Type::Pointer:
2136     result = getPointerType(getVariableArrayDecayedType(
2137                               cast<PointerType>(ty)->getPointeeType()));
2138     break;
2139 
2140   case Type::LValueReference: {
2141     const LValueReferenceType *lv = cast<LValueReferenceType>(ty);
2142     result = getLValueReferenceType(
2143                  getVariableArrayDecayedType(lv->getPointeeType()),
2144                                     lv->isSpelledAsLValue());
2145     break;
2146   }
2147 
2148   case Type::RValueReference: {
2149     const RValueReferenceType *lv = cast<RValueReferenceType>(ty);
2150     result = getRValueReferenceType(
2151                  getVariableArrayDecayedType(lv->getPointeeType()));
2152     break;
2153   }
2154 
2155   case Type::Atomic: {
2156     const AtomicType *at = cast<AtomicType>(ty);
2157     result = getAtomicType(getVariableArrayDecayedType(at->getValueType()));
2158     break;
2159   }
2160 
2161   case Type::ConstantArray: {
2162     const ConstantArrayType *cat = cast<ConstantArrayType>(ty);
2163     result = getConstantArrayType(
2164                  getVariableArrayDecayedType(cat->getElementType()),
2165                                   cat->getSize(),
2166                                   cat->getSizeModifier(),
2167                                   cat->getIndexTypeCVRQualifiers());
2168     break;
2169   }
2170 
2171   case Type::DependentSizedArray: {
2172     const DependentSizedArrayType *dat = cast<DependentSizedArrayType>(ty);
2173     result = getDependentSizedArrayType(
2174                  getVariableArrayDecayedType(dat->getElementType()),
2175                                         dat->getSizeExpr(),
2176                                         dat->getSizeModifier(),
2177                                         dat->getIndexTypeCVRQualifiers(),
2178                                         dat->getBracketsRange());
2179     break;
2180   }
2181 
2182   // Turn incomplete types into [*] types.
2183   case Type::IncompleteArray: {
2184     const IncompleteArrayType *iat = cast<IncompleteArrayType>(ty);
2185     result = getVariableArrayType(
2186                  getVariableArrayDecayedType(iat->getElementType()),
2187                                   /*size*/ 0,
2188                                   ArrayType::Normal,
2189                                   iat->getIndexTypeCVRQualifiers(),
2190                                   SourceRange());
2191     break;
2192   }
2193 
2194   // Turn VLA types into [*] types.
2195   case Type::VariableArray: {
2196     const VariableArrayType *vat = cast<VariableArrayType>(ty);
2197     result = getVariableArrayType(
2198                  getVariableArrayDecayedType(vat->getElementType()),
2199                                   /*size*/ 0,
2200                                   ArrayType::Star,
2201                                   vat->getIndexTypeCVRQualifiers(),
2202                                   vat->getBracketsRange());
2203     break;
2204   }
2205   }
2206 
2207   // Apply the top-level qualifiers from the original.
2208   return getQualifiedType(result, split.Quals);
2209 }
2210 
2211 /// getVariableArrayType - Returns a non-unique reference to the type for a
2212 /// variable array of the specified element type.
getVariableArrayType(QualType EltTy,Expr * NumElts,ArrayType::ArraySizeModifier ASM,unsigned IndexTypeQuals,SourceRange Brackets) const2213 QualType ASTContext::getVariableArrayType(QualType EltTy,
2214                                           Expr *NumElts,
2215                                           ArrayType::ArraySizeModifier ASM,
2216                                           unsigned IndexTypeQuals,
2217                                           SourceRange Brackets) const {
2218   // Since we don't unique expressions, it isn't possible to unique VLA's
2219   // that have an expression provided for their size.
2220   QualType Canon;
2221 
2222   // Be sure to pull qualifiers off the element type.
2223   if (!EltTy.isCanonical() || EltTy.hasLocalQualifiers()) {
2224     SplitQualType canonSplit = getCanonicalType(EltTy).split();
2225     Canon = getVariableArrayType(QualType(canonSplit.Ty, 0), NumElts, ASM,
2226                                  IndexTypeQuals, Brackets);
2227     Canon = getQualifiedType(Canon, canonSplit.Quals);
2228   }
2229 
2230   VariableArrayType *New = new(*this, TypeAlignment)
2231     VariableArrayType(EltTy, Canon, NumElts, ASM, IndexTypeQuals, Brackets);
2232 
2233   VariableArrayTypes.push_back(New);
2234   Types.push_back(New);
2235   return QualType(New, 0);
2236 }
2237 
2238 /// getDependentSizedArrayType - Returns a non-unique reference to
2239 /// the type for a dependently-sized array of the specified element
2240 /// type.
getDependentSizedArrayType(QualType elementType,Expr * numElements,ArrayType::ArraySizeModifier ASM,unsigned elementTypeQuals,SourceRange brackets) const2241 QualType ASTContext::getDependentSizedArrayType(QualType elementType,
2242                                                 Expr *numElements,
2243                                                 ArrayType::ArraySizeModifier ASM,
2244                                                 unsigned elementTypeQuals,
2245                                                 SourceRange brackets) const {
2246   assert((!numElements || numElements->isTypeDependent() ||
2247           numElements->isValueDependent()) &&
2248          "Size must be type- or value-dependent!");
2249 
2250   // Dependently-sized array types that do not have a specified number
2251   // of elements will have their sizes deduced from a dependent
2252   // initializer.  We do no canonicalization here at all, which is okay
2253   // because they can't be used in most locations.
2254   if (!numElements) {
2255     DependentSizedArrayType *newType
2256       = new (*this, TypeAlignment)
2257           DependentSizedArrayType(*this, elementType, QualType(),
2258                                   numElements, ASM, elementTypeQuals,
2259                                   brackets);
2260     Types.push_back(newType);
2261     return QualType(newType, 0);
2262   }
2263 
2264   // Otherwise, we actually build a new type every time, but we
2265   // also build a canonical type.
2266 
2267   SplitQualType canonElementType = getCanonicalType(elementType).split();
2268 
2269   void *insertPos = 0;
2270   llvm::FoldingSetNodeID ID;
2271   DependentSizedArrayType::Profile(ID, *this,
2272                                    QualType(canonElementType.Ty, 0),
2273                                    ASM, elementTypeQuals, numElements);
2274 
2275   // Look for an existing type with these properties.
2276   DependentSizedArrayType *canonTy =
2277     DependentSizedArrayTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, insertPos);
2278 
2279   // If we don't have one, build one.
2280   if (!canonTy) {
2281     canonTy = new (*this, TypeAlignment)
2282       DependentSizedArrayType(*this, QualType(canonElementType.Ty, 0),
2283                               QualType(), numElements, ASM, elementTypeQuals,
2284                               brackets);
2285     DependentSizedArrayTypes.InsertNode(canonTy, insertPos);
2286     Types.push_back(canonTy);
2287   }
2288 
2289   // Apply qualifiers from the element type to the array.
2290   QualType canon = getQualifiedType(QualType(canonTy,0),
2291                                     canonElementType.Quals);
2292 
2293   // If we didn't need extra canonicalization for the element type,
2294   // then just use that as our result.
2295   if (QualType(canonElementType.Ty, 0) == elementType)
2296     return canon;
2297 
2298   // Otherwise, we need to build a type which follows the spelling
2299   // of the element type.
2300   DependentSizedArrayType *sugaredType
2301     = new (*this, TypeAlignment)
2302         DependentSizedArrayType(*this, elementType, canon, numElements,
2303                                 ASM, elementTypeQuals, brackets);
2304   Types.push_back(sugaredType);
2305   return QualType(sugaredType, 0);
2306 }
2307 
getIncompleteArrayType(QualType elementType,ArrayType::ArraySizeModifier ASM,unsigned elementTypeQuals) const2308 QualType ASTContext::getIncompleteArrayType(QualType elementType,
2309                                             ArrayType::ArraySizeModifier ASM,
2310                                             unsigned elementTypeQuals) const {
2311   llvm::FoldingSetNodeID ID;
2312   IncompleteArrayType::Profile(ID, elementType, ASM, elementTypeQuals);
2313 
2314   void *insertPos = 0;
2315   if (IncompleteArrayType *iat =
2316        IncompleteArrayTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, insertPos))
2317     return QualType(iat, 0);
2318 
2319   // If the element type isn't canonical, this won't be a canonical type
2320   // either, so fill in the canonical type field.  We also have to pull
2321   // qualifiers off the element type.
2322   QualType canon;
2323 
2324   if (!elementType.isCanonical() || elementType.hasLocalQualifiers()) {
2325     SplitQualType canonSplit = getCanonicalType(elementType).split();
2326     canon = getIncompleteArrayType(QualType(canonSplit.Ty, 0),
2327                                    ASM, elementTypeQuals);
2328     canon = getQualifiedType(canon, canonSplit.Quals);
2329 
2330     // Get the new insert position for the node we care about.
2331     IncompleteArrayType *existing =
2332       IncompleteArrayTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, insertPos);
2333     assert(!existing && "Shouldn't be in the map!"); (void) existing;
2334   }
2335 
2336   IncompleteArrayType *newType = new (*this, TypeAlignment)
2337     IncompleteArrayType(elementType, canon, ASM, elementTypeQuals);
2338 
2339   IncompleteArrayTypes.InsertNode(newType, insertPos);
2340   Types.push_back(newType);
2341   return QualType(newType, 0);
2342 }
2343 
2344 /// getVectorType - Return the unique reference to a vector type of
2345 /// the specified element type and size. VectorType must be a built-in type.
getVectorType(QualType vecType,unsigned NumElts,VectorType::VectorKind VecKind) const2346 QualType ASTContext::getVectorType(QualType vecType, unsigned NumElts,
2347                                    VectorType::VectorKind VecKind) const {
2348   assert(vecType->isBuiltinType());
2349 
2350   // Check if we've already instantiated a vector of this type.
2351   llvm::FoldingSetNodeID ID;
2352   VectorType::Profile(ID, vecType, NumElts, Type::Vector, VecKind);
2353 
2354   void *InsertPos = 0;
2355   if (VectorType *VTP = VectorTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos))
2356     return QualType(VTP, 0);
2357 
2358   // If the element type isn't canonical, this won't be a canonical type either,
2359   // so fill in the canonical type field.
2360   QualType Canonical;
2361   if (!vecType.isCanonical()) {
2362     Canonical = getVectorType(getCanonicalType(vecType), NumElts, VecKind);
2363 
2364     // Get the new insert position for the node we care about.
2365     VectorType *NewIP = VectorTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos);
2366     assert(NewIP == 0 && "Shouldn't be in the map!"); (void)NewIP;
2367   }
2368   VectorType *New = new (*this, TypeAlignment)
2369     VectorType(vecType, NumElts, Canonical, VecKind);
2370   VectorTypes.InsertNode(New, InsertPos);
2371   Types.push_back(New);
2372   return QualType(New, 0);
2373 }
2374 
2375 /// getExtVectorType - Return the unique reference to an extended vector type of
2376 /// the specified element type and size. VectorType must be a built-in type.
2377 QualType
getExtVectorType(QualType vecType,unsigned NumElts) const2378 ASTContext::getExtVectorType(QualType vecType, unsigned NumElts) const {
2379   assert(vecType->isBuiltinType() || vecType->isDependentType());
2380 
2381   // Check if we've already instantiated a vector of this type.
2382   llvm::FoldingSetNodeID ID;
2383   VectorType::Profile(ID, vecType, NumElts, Type::ExtVector,
2384                       VectorType::GenericVector);
2385   void *InsertPos = 0;
2386   if (VectorType *VTP = VectorTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos))
2387     return QualType(VTP, 0);
2388 
2389   // If the element type isn't canonical, this won't be a canonical type either,
2390   // so fill in the canonical type field.
2391   QualType Canonical;
2392   if (!vecType.isCanonical()) {
2393     Canonical = getExtVectorType(getCanonicalType(vecType), NumElts);
2394 
2395     // Get the new insert position for the node we care about.
2396     VectorType *NewIP = VectorTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos);
2397     assert(NewIP == 0 && "Shouldn't be in the map!"); (void)NewIP;
2398   }
2399   ExtVectorType *New = new (*this, TypeAlignment)
2400     ExtVectorType(vecType, NumElts, Canonical);
2401   VectorTypes.InsertNode(New, InsertPos);
2402   Types.push_back(New);
2403   return QualType(New, 0);
2404 }
2405 
2406 QualType
getDependentSizedExtVectorType(QualType vecType,Expr * SizeExpr,SourceLocation AttrLoc) const2407 ASTContext::getDependentSizedExtVectorType(QualType vecType,
2408                                            Expr *SizeExpr,
2409                                            SourceLocation AttrLoc) const {
2410   llvm::FoldingSetNodeID ID;
2411   DependentSizedExtVectorType::Profile(ID, *this, getCanonicalType(vecType),
2412                                        SizeExpr);
2413 
2414   void *InsertPos = 0;
2415   DependentSizedExtVectorType *Canon
2416     = DependentSizedExtVectorTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos);
2417   DependentSizedExtVectorType *New;
2418   if (Canon) {
2419     // We already have a canonical version of this array type; use it as
2420     // the canonical type for a newly-built type.
2421     New = new (*this, TypeAlignment)
2422       DependentSizedExtVectorType(*this, vecType, QualType(Canon, 0),
2423                                   SizeExpr, AttrLoc);
2424   } else {
2425     QualType CanonVecTy = getCanonicalType(vecType);
2426     if (CanonVecTy == vecType) {
2427       New = new (*this, TypeAlignment)
2428         DependentSizedExtVectorType(*this, vecType, QualType(), SizeExpr,
2429                                     AttrLoc);
2430 
2431       DependentSizedExtVectorType *CanonCheck
2432         = DependentSizedExtVectorTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos);
2433       assert(!CanonCheck && "Dependent-sized ext_vector canonical type broken");
2434       (void)CanonCheck;
2435       DependentSizedExtVectorTypes.InsertNode(New, InsertPos);
2436     } else {
2437       QualType Canon = getDependentSizedExtVectorType(CanonVecTy, SizeExpr,
2438                                                       SourceLocation());
2439       New = new (*this, TypeAlignment)
2440         DependentSizedExtVectorType(*this, vecType, Canon, SizeExpr, AttrLoc);
2441     }
2442   }
2443 
2444   Types.push_back(New);
2445   return QualType(New, 0);
2446 }
2447 
2448 /// getFunctionNoProtoType - Return a K&R style C function type like 'int()'.
2449 ///
2450 QualType
getFunctionNoProtoType(QualType ResultTy,const FunctionType::ExtInfo & Info) const2451 ASTContext::getFunctionNoProtoType(QualType ResultTy,
2452                                    const FunctionType::ExtInfo &Info) const {
2453   const CallingConv DefaultCC = Info.getCC();
2454   const CallingConv CallConv = (LangOpts.MRTD && DefaultCC == CC_Default) ?
2455                                CC_X86StdCall : DefaultCC;
2456   // Unique functions, to guarantee there is only one function of a particular
2457   // structure.
2458   llvm::FoldingSetNodeID ID;
2459   FunctionNoProtoType::Profile(ID, ResultTy, Info);
2460 
2461   void *InsertPos = 0;
2462   if (FunctionNoProtoType *FT =
2463         FunctionNoProtoTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos))
2464     return QualType(FT, 0);
2465 
2466   QualType Canonical;
2467   if (!ResultTy.isCanonical() ||
2468       getCanonicalCallConv(CallConv) != CallConv) {
2469     Canonical =
2470       getFunctionNoProtoType(getCanonicalType(ResultTy),
2471                      Info.withCallingConv(getCanonicalCallConv(CallConv)));
2472 
2473     // Get the new insert position for the node we care about.
2474     FunctionNoProtoType *NewIP =
2475       FunctionNoProtoTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos);
2476     assert(NewIP == 0 && "Shouldn't be in the map!"); (void)NewIP;
2477   }
2478 
2479   FunctionProtoType::ExtInfo newInfo = Info.withCallingConv(CallConv);
2480   FunctionNoProtoType *New = new (*this, TypeAlignment)
2481     FunctionNoProtoType(ResultTy, Canonical, newInfo);
2482   Types.push_back(New);
2483   FunctionNoProtoTypes.InsertNode(New, InsertPos);
2484   return QualType(New, 0);
2485 }
2486 
2487 /// getFunctionType - Return a normal function type with a typed argument
2488 /// list.  isVariadic indicates whether the argument list includes '...'.
2489 QualType
getFunctionType(QualType ResultTy,const QualType * ArgArray,unsigned NumArgs,const FunctionProtoType::ExtProtoInfo & EPI) const2490 ASTContext::getFunctionType(QualType ResultTy,
2491                             const QualType *ArgArray, unsigned NumArgs,
2492                             const FunctionProtoType::ExtProtoInfo &EPI) const {
2493   // Unique functions, to guarantee there is only one function of a particular
2494   // structure.
2495   llvm::FoldingSetNodeID ID;
2496   FunctionProtoType::Profile(ID, ResultTy, ArgArray, NumArgs, EPI, *this);
2497 
2498   void *InsertPos = 0;
2499   if (FunctionProtoType *FTP =
2500         FunctionProtoTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos))
2501     return QualType(FTP, 0);
2502 
2503   // Determine whether the type being created is already canonical or not.
2504   bool isCanonical =
2505     EPI.ExceptionSpecType == EST_None && ResultTy.isCanonical() &&
2506     !EPI.HasTrailingReturn;
2507   for (unsigned i = 0; i != NumArgs && isCanonical; ++i)
2508     if (!ArgArray[i].isCanonicalAsParam())
2509       isCanonical = false;
2510 
2511   const CallingConv DefaultCC = EPI.ExtInfo.getCC();
2512   const CallingConv CallConv = (LangOpts.MRTD && DefaultCC == CC_Default) ?
2513                                CC_X86StdCall : DefaultCC;
2514 
2515   // If this type isn't canonical, get the canonical version of it.
2516   // The exception spec is not part of the canonical type.
2517   QualType Canonical;
2518   if (!isCanonical || getCanonicalCallConv(CallConv) != CallConv) {
2519     SmallVector<QualType, 16> CanonicalArgs;
2520     CanonicalArgs.reserve(NumArgs);
2521     for (unsigned i = 0; i != NumArgs; ++i)
2522       CanonicalArgs.push_back(getCanonicalParamType(ArgArray[i]));
2523 
2524     FunctionProtoType::ExtProtoInfo CanonicalEPI = EPI;
2525     CanonicalEPI.HasTrailingReturn = false;
2526     CanonicalEPI.ExceptionSpecType = EST_None;
2527     CanonicalEPI.NumExceptions = 0;
2528     CanonicalEPI.ExtInfo
2529       = CanonicalEPI.ExtInfo.withCallingConv(getCanonicalCallConv(CallConv));
2530 
2531     Canonical = getFunctionType(getCanonicalType(ResultTy),
2532                                 CanonicalArgs.data(), NumArgs,
2533                                 CanonicalEPI);
2534 
2535     // Get the new insert position for the node we care about.
2536     FunctionProtoType *NewIP =
2537       FunctionProtoTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos);
2538     assert(NewIP == 0 && "Shouldn't be in the map!"); (void)NewIP;
2539   }
2540 
2541   // FunctionProtoType objects are allocated with extra bytes after
2542   // them for three variable size arrays at the end:
2543   //  - parameter types
2544   //  - exception types
2545   //  - consumed-arguments flags
2546   // Instead of the exception types, there could be a noexcept
2547   // expression, or information used to resolve the exception
2548   // specification.
2549   size_t Size = sizeof(FunctionProtoType) +
2550                 NumArgs * sizeof(QualType);
2551   if (EPI.ExceptionSpecType == EST_Dynamic) {
2552     Size += EPI.NumExceptions * sizeof(QualType);
2553   } else if (EPI.ExceptionSpecType == EST_ComputedNoexcept) {
2554     Size += sizeof(Expr*);
2555   } else if (EPI.ExceptionSpecType == EST_Uninstantiated) {
2556     Size += 2 * sizeof(FunctionDecl*);
2557   } else if (EPI.ExceptionSpecType == EST_Unevaluated) {
2558     Size += sizeof(FunctionDecl*);
2559   }
2560   if (EPI.ConsumedArguments)
2561     Size += NumArgs * sizeof(bool);
2562 
2563   FunctionProtoType *FTP = (FunctionProtoType*) Allocate(Size, TypeAlignment);
2564   FunctionProtoType::ExtProtoInfo newEPI = EPI;
2565   newEPI.ExtInfo = EPI.ExtInfo.withCallingConv(CallConv);
2566   new (FTP) FunctionProtoType(ResultTy, ArgArray, NumArgs, Canonical, newEPI);
2567   Types.push_back(FTP);
2568   FunctionProtoTypes.InsertNode(FTP, InsertPos);
2569   return QualType(FTP, 0);
2570 }
2571 
2572 #ifndef NDEBUG
NeedsInjectedClassNameType(const RecordDecl * D)2573 static bool NeedsInjectedClassNameType(const RecordDecl *D) {
2574   if (!isa<CXXRecordDecl>(D)) return false;
2575   const CXXRecordDecl *RD = cast<CXXRecordDecl>(D);
2576   if (isa<ClassTemplatePartialSpecializationDecl>(RD))
2577     return true;
2578   if (RD->getDescribedClassTemplate() &&
2579       !isa<ClassTemplateSpecializationDecl>(RD))
2580     return true;
2581   return false;
2582 }
2583 #endif
2584 
2585 /// getInjectedClassNameType - Return the unique reference to the
2586 /// injected class name type for the specified templated declaration.
getInjectedClassNameType(CXXRecordDecl * Decl,QualType TST) const2587 QualType ASTContext::getInjectedClassNameType(CXXRecordDecl *Decl,
2588                                               QualType TST) const {
2589   assert(NeedsInjectedClassNameType(Decl));
2590   if (Decl->TypeForDecl) {
2591     assert(isa<InjectedClassNameType>(Decl->TypeForDecl));
2592   } else if (CXXRecordDecl *PrevDecl = Decl->getPreviousDecl()) {
2593     assert(PrevDecl->TypeForDecl && "previous declaration has no type");
2594     Decl->TypeForDecl = PrevDecl->TypeForDecl;
2595     assert(isa<InjectedClassNameType>(Decl->TypeForDecl));
2596   } else {
2597     Type *newType =
2598       new (*this, TypeAlignment) InjectedClassNameType(Decl, TST);
2599     Decl->TypeForDecl = newType;
2600     Types.push_back(newType);
2601   }
2602   return QualType(Decl->TypeForDecl, 0);
2603 }
2604 
2605 /// getTypeDeclType - Return the unique reference to the type for the
2606 /// specified type declaration.
getTypeDeclTypeSlow(const TypeDecl * Decl) const2607 QualType ASTContext::getTypeDeclTypeSlow(const TypeDecl *Decl) const {
2608   assert(Decl && "Passed null for Decl param");
2609   assert(!Decl->TypeForDecl && "TypeForDecl present in slow case");
2610 
2611   if (const TypedefNameDecl *Typedef = dyn_cast<TypedefNameDecl>(Decl))
2612     return getTypedefType(Typedef);
2613 
2614   assert(!isa<TemplateTypeParmDecl>(Decl) &&
2615          "Template type parameter types are always available.");
2616 
2617   if (const RecordDecl *Record = dyn_cast<RecordDecl>(Decl)) {
2618     assert(!Record->getPreviousDecl() &&
2619            "struct/union has previous declaration");
2620     assert(!NeedsInjectedClassNameType(Record));
2621     return getRecordType(Record);
2622   } else if (const EnumDecl *Enum = dyn_cast<EnumDecl>(Decl)) {
2623     assert(!Enum->getPreviousDecl() &&
2624            "enum has previous declaration");
2625     return getEnumType(Enum);
2626   } else if (const UnresolvedUsingTypenameDecl *Using =
2627                dyn_cast<UnresolvedUsingTypenameDecl>(Decl)) {
2628     Type *newType = new (*this, TypeAlignment) UnresolvedUsingType(Using);
2629     Decl->TypeForDecl = newType;
2630     Types.push_back(newType);
2631   } else
2632     llvm_unreachable("TypeDecl without a type?");
2633 
2634   return QualType(Decl->TypeForDecl, 0);
2635 }
2636 
2637 /// getTypedefType - Return the unique reference to the type for the
2638 /// specified typedef name decl.
2639 QualType
getTypedefType(const TypedefNameDecl * Decl,QualType Canonical) const2640 ASTContext::getTypedefType(const TypedefNameDecl *Decl,
2641                            QualType Canonical) const {
2642   if (Decl->TypeForDecl) return QualType(Decl->TypeForDecl, 0);
2643 
2644   if (Canonical.isNull())
2645     Canonical = getCanonicalType(Decl->getUnderlyingType());
2646   TypedefType *newType = new(*this, TypeAlignment)
2647     TypedefType(Type::Typedef, Decl, Canonical);
2648   Decl->TypeForDecl = newType;
2649   Types.push_back(newType);
2650   return QualType(newType, 0);
2651 }
2652 
getRecordType(const RecordDecl * Decl) const2653 QualType ASTContext::getRecordType(const RecordDecl *Decl) const {
2654   if (Decl->TypeForDecl) return QualType(Decl->TypeForDecl, 0);
2655 
2656   if (const RecordDecl *PrevDecl = Decl->getPreviousDecl())
2657     if (PrevDecl->TypeForDecl)
2658       return QualType(Decl->TypeForDecl = PrevDecl->TypeForDecl, 0);
2659 
2660   RecordType *newType = new (*this, TypeAlignment) RecordType(Decl);
2661   Decl->TypeForDecl = newType;
2662   Types.push_back(newType);
2663   return QualType(newType, 0);
2664 }
2665 
getEnumType(const EnumDecl * Decl) const2666 QualType ASTContext::getEnumType(const EnumDecl *Decl) const {
2667   if (Decl->TypeForDecl) return QualType(Decl->TypeForDecl, 0);
2668 
2669   if (const EnumDecl *PrevDecl = Decl->getPreviousDecl())
2670     if (PrevDecl->TypeForDecl)
2671       return QualType(Decl->TypeForDecl = PrevDecl->TypeForDecl, 0);
2672 
2673   EnumType *newType = new (*this, TypeAlignment) EnumType(Decl);
2674   Decl->TypeForDecl = newType;
2675   Types.push_back(newType);
2676   return QualType(newType, 0);
2677 }
2678 
getAttributedType(AttributedType::Kind attrKind,QualType modifiedType,QualType equivalentType)2679 QualType ASTContext::getAttributedType(AttributedType::Kind attrKind,
2680                                        QualType modifiedType,
2681                                        QualType equivalentType) {
2682   llvm::FoldingSetNodeID id;
2683   AttributedType::Profile(id, attrKind, modifiedType, equivalentType);
2684 
2685   void *insertPos = 0;
2686   AttributedType *type = AttributedTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(id, insertPos);
2687   if (type) return QualType(type, 0);
2688 
2689   QualType canon = getCanonicalType(equivalentType);
2690   type = new (*this, TypeAlignment)
2691            AttributedType(canon, attrKind, modifiedType, equivalentType);
2692 
2693   Types.push_back(type);
2694   AttributedTypes.InsertNode(type, insertPos);
2695 
2696   return QualType(type, 0);
2697 }
2698 
2699 
2700 /// \brief Retrieve a substitution-result type.
2701 QualType
getSubstTemplateTypeParmType(const TemplateTypeParmType * Parm,QualType Replacement) const2702 ASTContext::getSubstTemplateTypeParmType(const TemplateTypeParmType *Parm,
2703                                          QualType Replacement) const {
2704   assert(Replacement.isCanonical()
2705          && "replacement types must always be canonical");
2706 
2707   llvm::FoldingSetNodeID ID;
2708   SubstTemplateTypeParmType::Profile(ID, Parm, Replacement);
2709   void *InsertPos = 0;
2710   SubstTemplateTypeParmType *SubstParm
2711     = SubstTemplateTypeParmTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos);
2712 
2713   if (!SubstParm) {
2714     SubstParm = new (*this, TypeAlignment)
2715       SubstTemplateTypeParmType(Parm, Replacement);
2716     Types.push_back(SubstParm);
2717     SubstTemplateTypeParmTypes.InsertNode(SubstParm, InsertPos);
2718   }
2719 
2720   return QualType(SubstParm, 0);
2721 }
2722 
2723 /// \brief Retrieve a
getSubstTemplateTypeParmPackType(const TemplateTypeParmType * Parm,const TemplateArgument & ArgPack)2724 QualType ASTContext::getSubstTemplateTypeParmPackType(
2725                                           const TemplateTypeParmType *Parm,
2726                                               const TemplateArgument &ArgPack) {
2727 #ifndef NDEBUG
2728   for (TemplateArgument::pack_iterator P = ArgPack.pack_begin(),
2729                                     PEnd = ArgPack.pack_end();
2730        P != PEnd; ++P) {
2731     assert(P->getKind() == TemplateArgument::Type &&"Pack contains a non-type");
2732     assert(P->getAsType().isCanonical() && "Pack contains non-canonical type");
2733   }
2734 #endif
2735 
2736   llvm::FoldingSetNodeID ID;
2737   SubstTemplateTypeParmPackType::Profile(ID, Parm, ArgPack);
2738   void *InsertPos = 0;
2739   if (SubstTemplateTypeParmPackType *SubstParm
2740         = SubstTemplateTypeParmPackTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos))
2741     return QualType(SubstParm, 0);
2742 
2743   QualType Canon;
2744   if (!Parm->isCanonicalUnqualified()) {
2745     Canon = getCanonicalType(QualType(Parm, 0));
2746     Canon = getSubstTemplateTypeParmPackType(cast<TemplateTypeParmType>(Canon),
2747                                              ArgPack);
2748     SubstTemplateTypeParmPackTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos);
2749   }
2750 
2751   SubstTemplateTypeParmPackType *SubstParm
2752     = new (*this, TypeAlignment) SubstTemplateTypeParmPackType(Parm, Canon,
2753                                                                ArgPack);
2754   Types.push_back(SubstParm);
2755   SubstTemplateTypeParmTypes.InsertNode(SubstParm, InsertPos);
2756   return QualType(SubstParm, 0);
2757 }
2758 
2759 /// \brief Retrieve the template type parameter type for a template
2760 /// parameter or parameter pack with the given depth, index, and (optionally)
2761 /// name.
getTemplateTypeParmType(unsigned Depth,unsigned Index,bool ParameterPack,TemplateTypeParmDecl * TTPDecl) const2762 QualType ASTContext::getTemplateTypeParmType(unsigned Depth, unsigned Index,
2763                                              bool ParameterPack,
2764                                              TemplateTypeParmDecl *TTPDecl) const {
2765   llvm::FoldingSetNodeID ID;
2766   TemplateTypeParmType::Profile(ID, Depth, Index, ParameterPack, TTPDecl);
2767   void *InsertPos = 0;
2768   TemplateTypeParmType *TypeParm
2769     = TemplateTypeParmTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos);
2770 
2771   if (TypeParm)
2772     return QualType(TypeParm, 0);
2773 
2774   if (TTPDecl) {
2775     QualType Canon = getTemplateTypeParmType(Depth, Index, ParameterPack);
2776     TypeParm = new (*this, TypeAlignment) TemplateTypeParmType(TTPDecl, Canon);
2777 
2778     TemplateTypeParmType *TypeCheck
2779       = TemplateTypeParmTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos);
2780     assert(!TypeCheck && "Template type parameter canonical type broken");
2781     (void)TypeCheck;
2782   } else
2783     TypeParm = new (*this, TypeAlignment)
2784       TemplateTypeParmType(Depth, Index, ParameterPack);
2785 
2786   Types.push_back(TypeParm);
2787   TemplateTypeParmTypes.InsertNode(TypeParm, InsertPos);
2788 
2789   return QualType(TypeParm, 0);
2790 }
2791 
2792 TypeSourceInfo *
getTemplateSpecializationTypeInfo(TemplateName Name,SourceLocation NameLoc,const TemplateArgumentListInfo & Args,QualType Underlying) const2793 ASTContext::getTemplateSpecializationTypeInfo(TemplateName Name,
2794                                               SourceLocation NameLoc,
2795                                         const TemplateArgumentListInfo &Args,
2796                                               QualType Underlying) const {
2797   assert(!Name.getAsDependentTemplateName() &&
2798          "No dependent template names here!");
2799   QualType TST = getTemplateSpecializationType(Name, Args, Underlying);
2800 
2801   TypeSourceInfo *DI = CreateTypeSourceInfo(TST);
2802   TemplateSpecializationTypeLoc TL
2803     = cast<TemplateSpecializationTypeLoc>(DI->getTypeLoc());
2804   TL.setTemplateKeywordLoc(SourceLocation());
2805   TL.setTemplateNameLoc(NameLoc);
2806   TL.setLAngleLoc(Args.getLAngleLoc());
2807   TL.setRAngleLoc(Args.getRAngleLoc());
2808   for (unsigned i = 0, e = TL.getNumArgs(); i != e; ++i)
2809     TL.setArgLocInfo(i, Args[i].getLocInfo());
2810   return DI;
2811 }
2812 
2813 QualType
getTemplateSpecializationType(TemplateName Template,const TemplateArgumentListInfo & Args,QualType Underlying) const2814 ASTContext::getTemplateSpecializationType(TemplateName Template,
2815                                           const TemplateArgumentListInfo &Args,
2816                                           QualType Underlying) const {
2817   assert(!Template.getAsDependentTemplateName() &&
2818          "No dependent template names here!");
2819 
2820   unsigned NumArgs = Args.size();
2821 
2822   SmallVector<TemplateArgument, 4> ArgVec;
2823   ArgVec.reserve(NumArgs);
2824   for (unsigned i = 0; i != NumArgs; ++i)
2825     ArgVec.push_back(Args[i].getArgument());
2826 
2827   return getTemplateSpecializationType(Template, ArgVec.data(), NumArgs,
2828                                        Underlying);
2829 }
2830 
2831 #ifndef NDEBUG
hasAnyPackExpansions(const TemplateArgument * Args,unsigned NumArgs)2832 static bool hasAnyPackExpansions(const TemplateArgument *Args,
2833                                  unsigned NumArgs) {
2834   for (unsigned I = 0; I != NumArgs; ++I)
2835     if (Args[I].isPackExpansion())
2836       return true;
2837 
2838   return true;
2839 }
2840 #endif
2841 
2842 QualType
getTemplateSpecializationType(TemplateName Template,const TemplateArgument * Args,unsigned NumArgs,QualType Underlying) const2843 ASTContext::getTemplateSpecializationType(TemplateName Template,
2844                                           const TemplateArgument *Args,
2845                                           unsigned NumArgs,
2846                                           QualType Underlying) const {
2847   assert(!Template.getAsDependentTemplateName() &&
2848          "No dependent template names here!");
2849   // Look through qualified template names.
2850   if (QualifiedTemplateName *QTN = Template.getAsQualifiedTemplateName())
2851     Template = TemplateName(QTN->getTemplateDecl());
2852 
2853   bool IsTypeAlias =
2854     Template.getAsTemplateDecl() &&
2855     isa<TypeAliasTemplateDecl>(Template.getAsTemplateDecl());
2856   QualType CanonType;
2857   if (!Underlying.isNull())
2858     CanonType = getCanonicalType(Underlying);
2859   else {
2860     // We can get here with an alias template when the specialization contains
2861     // a pack expansion that does not match up with a parameter pack.
2862     assert((!IsTypeAlias || hasAnyPackExpansions(Args, NumArgs)) &&
2863            "Caller must compute aliased type");
2864     IsTypeAlias = false;
2865     CanonType = getCanonicalTemplateSpecializationType(Template, Args,
2866                                                        NumArgs);
2867   }
2868 
2869   // Allocate the (non-canonical) template specialization type, but don't
2870   // try to unique it: these types typically have location information that
2871   // we don't unique and don't want to lose.
2872   void *Mem = Allocate(sizeof(TemplateSpecializationType) +
2873                        sizeof(TemplateArgument) * NumArgs +
2874                        (IsTypeAlias? sizeof(QualType) : 0),
2875                        TypeAlignment);
2876   TemplateSpecializationType *Spec
2877     = new (Mem) TemplateSpecializationType(Template, Args, NumArgs, CanonType,
2878                                          IsTypeAlias ? Underlying : QualType());
2879 
2880   Types.push_back(Spec);
2881   return QualType(Spec, 0);
2882 }
2883 
2884 QualType
getCanonicalTemplateSpecializationType(TemplateName Template,const TemplateArgument * Args,unsigned NumArgs) const2885 ASTContext::getCanonicalTemplateSpecializationType(TemplateName Template,
2886                                                    const TemplateArgument *Args,
2887                                                    unsigned NumArgs) const {
2888   assert(!Template.getAsDependentTemplateName() &&
2889          "No dependent template names here!");
2890 
2891   // Look through qualified template names.
2892   if (QualifiedTemplateName *QTN = Template.getAsQualifiedTemplateName())
2893     Template = TemplateName(QTN->getTemplateDecl());
2894 
2895   // Build the canonical template specialization type.
2896   TemplateName CanonTemplate = getCanonicalTemplateName(Template);
2897   SmallVector<TemplateArgument, 4> CanonArgs;
2898   CanonArgs.reserve(NumArgs);
2899   for (unsigned I = 0; I != NumArgs; ++I)
2900     CanonArgs.push_back(getCanonicalTemplateArgument(Args[I]));
2901 
2902   // Determine whether this canonical template specialization type already
2903   // exists.
2904   llvm::FoldingSetNodeID ID;
2905   TemplateSpecializationType::Profile(ID, CanonTemplate,
2906                                       CanonArgs.data(), NumArgs, *this);
2907 
2908   void *InsertPos = 0;
2909   TemplateSpecializationType *Spec
2910     = TemplateSpecializationTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos);
2911 
2912   if (!Spec) {
2913     // Allocate a new canonical template specialization type.
2914     void *Mem = Allocate((sizeof(TemplateSpecializationType) +
2915                           sizeof(TemplateArgument) * NumArgs),
2916                          TypeAlignment);
2917     Spec = new (Mem) TemplateSpecializationType(CanonTemplate,
2918                                                 CanonArgs.data(), NumArgs,
2919                                                 QualType(), QualType());
2920     Types.push_back(Spec);
2921     TemplateSpecializationTypes.InsertNode(Spec, InsertPos);
2922   }
2923 
2924   assert(Spec->isDependentType() &&
2925          "Non-dependent template-id type must have a canonical type");
2926   return QualType(Spec, 0);
2927 }
2928 
2929 QualType
getElaboratedType(ElaboratedTypeKeyword Keyword,NestedNameSpecifier * NNS,QualType NamedType) const2930 ASTContext::getElaboratedType(ElaboratedTypeKeyword Keyword,
2931                               NestedNameSpecifier *NNS,
2932                               QualType NamedType) const {
2933   llvm::FoldingSetNodeID ID;
2934   ElaboratedType::Profile(ID, Keyword, NNS, NamedType);
2935 
2936   void *InsertPos = 0;
2937   ElaboratedType *T = ElaboratedTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos);
2938   if (T)
2939     return QualType(T, 0);
2940 
2941   QualType Canon = NamedType;
2942   if (!Canon.isCanonical()) {
2943     Canon = getCanonicalType(NamedType);
2944     ElaboratedType *CheckT = ElaboratedTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos);
2945     assert(!CheckT && "Elaborated canonical type broken");
2946     (void)CheckT;
2947   }
2948 
2949   T = new (*this) ElaboratedType(Keyword, NNS, NamedType, Canon);
2950   Types.push_back(T);
2951   ElaboratedTypes.InsertNode(T, InsertPos);
2952   return QualType(T, 0);
2953 }
2954 
2955 QualType
getParenType(QualType InnerType) const2956 ASTContext::getParenType(QualType InnerType) const {
2957   llvm::FoldingSetNodeID ID;
2958   ParenType::Profile(ID, InnerType);
2959 
2960   void *InsertPos = 0;
2961   ParenType *T = ParenTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos);
2962   if (T)
2963     return QualType(T, 0);
2964 
2965   QualType Canon = InnerType;
2966   if (!Canon.isCanonical()) {
2967     Canon = getCanonicalType(InnerType);
2968     ParenType *CheckT = ParenTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos);
2969     assert(!CheckT && "Paren canonical type broken");
2970     (void)CheckT;
2971   }
2972 
2973   T = new (*this) ParenType(InnerType, Canon);
2974   Types.push_back(T);
2975   ParenTypes.InsertNode(T, InsertPos);
2976   return QualType(T, 0);
2977 }
2978 
getDependentNameType(ElaboratedTypeKeyword Keyword,NestedNameSpecifier * NNS,const IdentifierInfo * Name,QualType Canon) const2979 QualType ASTContext::getDependentNameType(ElaboratedTypeKeyword Keyword,
2980                                           NestedNameSpecifier *NNS,
2981                                           const IdentifierInfo *Name,
2982                                           QualType Canon) const {
2983   assert(NNS->isDependent() && "nested-name-specifier must be dependent");
2984 
2985   if (Canon.isNull()) {
2986     NestedNameSpecifier *CanonNNS = getCanonicalNestedNameSpecifier(NNS);
2987     ElaboratedTypeKeyword CanonKeyword = Keyword;
2988     if (Keyword == ETK_None)
2989       CanonKeyword = ETK_Typename;
2990 
2991     if (CanonNNS != NNS || CanonKeyword != Keyword)
2992       Canon = getDependentNameType(CanonKeyword, CanonNNS, Name);
2993   }
2994 
2995   llvm::FoldingSetNodeID ID;
2996   DependentNameType::Profile(ID, Keyword, NNS, Name);
2997 
2998   void *InsertPos = 0;
2999   DependentNameType *T
3000     = DependentNameTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos);
3001   if (T)
3002     return QualType(T, 0);
3003 
3004   T = new (*this) DependentNameType(Keyword, NNS, Name, Canon);
3005   Types.push_back(T);
3006   DependentNameTypes.InsertNode(T, InsertPos);
3007   return QualType(T, 0);
3008 }
3009 
3010 QualType
getDependentTemplateSpecializationType(ElaboratedTypeKeyword Keyword,NestedNameSpecifier * NNS,const IdentifierInfo * Name,const TemplateArgumentListInfo & Args) const3011 ASTContext::getDependentTemplateSpecializationType(
3012                                  ElaboratedTypeKeyword Keyword,
3013                                  NestedNameSpecifier *NNS,
3014                                  const IdentifierInfo *Name,
3015                                  const TemplateArgumentListInfo &Args) const {
3016   // TODO: avoid this copy
3017   SmallVector<TemplateArgument, 16> ArgCopy;
3018   for (unsigned I = 0, E = Args.size(); I != E; ++I)
3019     ArgCopy.push_back(Args[I].getArgument());
3020   return getDependentTemplateSpecializationType(Keyword, NNS, Name,
3021                                                 ArgCopy.size(),
3022                                                 ArgCopy.data());
3023 }
3024 
3025 QualType
getDependentTemplateSpecializationType(ElaboratedTypeKeyword Keyword,NestedNameSpecifier * NNS,const IdentifierInfo * Name,unsigned NumArgs,const TemplateArgument * Args) const3026 ASTContext::getDependentTemplateSpecializationType(
3027                                  ElaboratedTypeKeyword Keyword,
3028                                  NestedNameSpecifier *NNS,
3029                                  const IdentifierInfo *Name,
3030                                  unsigned NumArgs,
3031                                  const TemplateArgument *Args) const {
3032   assert((!NNS || NNS->isDependent()) &&
3033          "nested-name-specifier must be dependent");
3034 
3035   llvm::FoldingSetNodeID ID;
3036   DependentTemplateSpecializationType::Profile(ID, *this, Keyword, NNS,
3037                                                Name, NumArgs, Args);
3038 
3039   void *InsertPos = 0;
3040   DependentTemplateSpecializationType *T
3041     = DependentTemplateSpecializationTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos);
3042   if (T)
3043     return QualType(T, 0);
3044 
3045   NestedNameSpecifier *CanonNNS = getCanonicalNestedNameSpecifier(NNS);
3046 
3047   ElaboratedTypeKeyword CanonKeyword = Keyword;
3048   if (Keyword == ETK_None) CanonKeyword = ETK_Typename;
3049 
3050   bool AnyNonCanonArgs = false;
3051   SmallVector<TemplateArgument, 16> CanonArgs(NumArgs);
3052   for (unsigned I = 0; I != NumArgs; ++I) {
3053     CanonArgs[I] = getCanonicalTemplateArgument(Args[I]);
3054     if (!CanonArgs[I].structurallyEquals(Args[I]))
3055       AnyNonCanonArgs = true;
3056   }
3057 
3058   QualType Canon;
3059   if (AnyNonCanonArgs || CanonNNS != NNS || CanonKeyword != Keyword) {
3060     Canon = getDependentTemplateSpecializationType(CanonKeyword, CanonNNS,
3061                                                    Name, NumArgs,
3062                                                    CanonArgs.data());
3063 
3064     // Find the insert position again.
3065     DependentTemplateSpecializationTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos);
3066   }
3067 
3068   void *Mem = Allocate((sizeof(DependentTemplateSpecializationType) +
3069                         sizeof(TemplateArgument) * NumArgs),
3070                        TypeAlignment);
3071   T = new (Mem) DependentTemplateSpecializationType(Keyword, NNS,
3072                                                     Name, NumArgs, Args, Canon);
3073   Types.push_back(T);
3074   DependentTemplateSpecializationTypes.InsertNode(T, InsertPos);
3075   return QualType(T, 0);
3076 }
3077 
getPackExpansionType(QualType Pattern,llvm::Optional<unsigned> NumExpansions)3078 QualType ASTContext::getPackExpansionType(QualType Pattern,
3079                                       llvm::Optional<unsigned> NumExpansions) {
3080   llvm::FoldingSetNodeID ID;
3081   PackExpansionType::Profile(ID, Pattern, NumExpansions);
3082 
3083   assert(Pattern->containsUnexpandedParameterPack() &&
3084          "Pack expansions must expand one or more parameter packs");
3085   void *InsertPos = 0;
3086   PackExpansionType *T
3087     = PackExpansionTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos);
3088   if (T)
3089     return QualType(T, 0);
3090 
3091   QualType Canon;
3092   if (!Pattern.isCanonical()) {
3093     Canon = getCanonicalType(Pattern);
3094     // The canonical type might not contain an unexpanded parameter pack, if it
3095     // contains an alias template specialization which ignores one of its
3096     // parameters.
3097     if (Canon->containsUnexpandedParameterPack()) {
3098       Canon = getPackExpansionType(getCanonicalType(Pattern), NumExpansions);
3099 
3100       // Find the insert position again, in case we inserted an element into
3101       // PackExpansionTypes and invalidated our insert position.
3102       PackExpansionTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos);
3103     }
3104   }
3105 
3106   T = new (*this) PackExpansionType(Pattern, Canon, NumExpansions);
3107   Types.push_back(T);
3108   PackExpansionTypes.InsertNode(T, InsertPos);
3109   return QualType(T, 0);
3110 }
3111 
3112 /// CmpProtocolNames - Comparison predicate for sorting protocols
3113 /// alphabetically.
CmpProtocolNames(const ObjCProtocolDecl * LHS,const ObjCProtocolDecl * RHS)3114 static bool CmpProtocolNames(const ObjCProtocolDecl *LHS,
3115                             const ObjCProtocolDecl *RHS) {
3116   return LHS->getDeclName() < RHS->getDeclName();
3117 }
3118 
areSortedAndUniqued(ObjCProtocolDecl * const * Protocols,unsigned NumProtocols)3119 static bool areSortedAndUniqued(ObjCProtocolDecl * const *Protocols,
3120                                 unsigned NumProtocols) {
3121   if (NumProtocols == 0) return true;
3122 
3123   if (Protocols[0]->getCanonicalDecl() != Protocols[0])
3124     return false;
3125 
3126   for (unsigned i = 1; i != NumProtocols; ++i)
3127     if (!CmpProtocolNames(Protocols[i-1], Protocols[i]) ||
3128         Protocols[i]->getCanonicalDecl() != Protocols[i])
3129       return false;
3130   return true;
3131 }
3132 
SortAndUniqueProtocols(ObjCProtocolDecl ** Protocols,unsigned & NumProtocols)3133 static void SortAndUniqueProtocols(ObjCProtocolDecl **Protocols,
3134                                    unsigned &NumProtocols) {
3135   ObjCProtocolDecl **ProtocolsEnd = Protocols+NumProtocols;
3136 
3137   // Sort protocols, keyed by name.
3138   std::sort(Protocols, Protocols+NumProtocols, CmpProtocolNames);
3139 
3140   // Canonicalize.
3141   for (unsigned I = 0, N = NumProtocols; I != N; ++I)
3142     Protocols[I] = Protocols[I]->getCanonicalDecl();
3143 
3144   // Remove duplicates.
3145   ProtocolsEnd = std::unique(Protocols, ProtocolsEnd);
3146   NumProtocols = ProtocolsEnd-Protocols;
3147 }
3148 
getObjCObjectType(QualType BaseType,ObjCProtocolDecl * const * Protocols,unsigned NumProtocols) const3149 QualType ASTContext::getObjCObjectType(QualType BaseType,
3150                                        ObjCProtocolDecl * const *Protocols,
3151                                        unsigned NumProtocols) const {
3152   // If the base type is an interface and there aren't any protocols
3153   // to add, then the interface type will do just fine.
3154   if (!NumProtocols && isa<ObjCInterfaceType>(BaseType))
3155     return BaseType;
3156 
3157   // Look in the folding set for an existing type.
3158   llvm::FoldingSetNodeID ID;
3159   ObjCObjectTypeImpl::Profile(ID, BaseType, Protocols, NumProtocols);
3160   void *InsertPos = 0;
3161   if (ObjCObjectType *QT = ObjCObjectTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos))
3162     return QualType(QT, 0);
3163 
3164   // Build the canonical type, which has the canonical base type and
3165   // a sorted-and-uniqued list of protocols.
3166   QualType Canonical;
3167   bool ProtocolsSorted = areSortedAndUniqued(Protocols, NumProtocols);
3168   if (!ProtocolsSorted || !BaseType.isCanonical()) {
3169     if (!ProtocolsSorted) {
3170       SmallVector<ObjCProtocolDecl*, 8> Sorted(Protocols,
3171                                                      Protocols + NumProtocols);
3172       unsigned UniqueCount = NumProtocols;
3173 
3174       SortAndUniqueProtocols(&Sorted[0], UniqueCount);
3175       Canonical = getObjCObjectType(getCanonicalType(BaseType),
3176                                     &Sorted[0], UniqueCount);
3177     } else {
3178       Canonical = getObjCObjectType(getCanonicalType(BaseType),
3179                                     Protocols, NumProtocols);
3180     }
3181 
3182     // Regenerate InsertPos.
3183     ObjCObjectTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos);
3184   }
3185 
3186   unsigned Size = sizeof(ObjCObjectTypeImpl);
3187   Size += NumProtocols * sizeof(ObjCProtocolDecl *);
3188   void *Mem = Allocate(Size, TypeAlignment);
3189   ObjCObjectTypeImpl *T =
3190     new (Mem) ObjCObjectTypeImpl(Canonical, BaseType, Protocols, NumProtocols);
3191 
3192   Types.push_back(T);
3193   ObjCObjectTypes.InsertNode(T, InsertPos);
3194   return QualType(T, 0);
3195 }
3196 
3197 /// getObjCObjectPointerType - Return a ObjCObjectPointerType type for
3198 /// the given object type.
getObjCObjectPointerType(QualType ObjectT) const3199 QualType ASTContext::getObjCObjectPointerType(QualType ObjectT) const {
3200   llvm::FoldingSetNodeID ID;
3201   ObjCObjectPointerType::Profile(ID, ObjectT);
3202 
3203   void *InsertPos = 0;
3204   if (ObjCObjectPointerType *QT =
3205               ObjCObjectPointerTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos))
3206     return QualType(QT, 0);
3207 
3208   // Find the canonical object type.
3209   QualType Canonical;
3210   if (!ObjectT.isCanonical()) {
3211     Canonical = getObjCObjectPointerType(getCanonicalType(ObjectT));
3212 
3213     // Regenerate InsertPos.
3214     ObjCObjectPointerTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos);
3215   }
3216 
3217   // No match.
3218   void *Mem = Allocate(sizeof(ObjCObjectPointerType), TypeAlignment);
3219   ObjCObjectPointerType *QType =
3220     new (Mem) ObjCObjectPointerType(Canonical, ObjectT);
3221 
3222   Types.push_back(QType);
3223   ObjCObjectPointerTypes.InsertNode(QType, InsertPos);
3224   return QualType(QType, 0);
3225 }
3226 
3227 /// getObjCInterfaceType - Return the unique reference to the type for the
3228 /// specified ObjC interface decl. The list of protocols is optional.
getObjCInterfaceType(const ObjCInterfaceDecl * Decl,ObjCInterfaceDecl * PrevDecl) const3229 QualType ASTContext::getObjCInterfaceType(const ObjCInterfaceDecl *Decl,
3230                                           ObjCInterfaceDecl *PrevDecl) const {
3231   if (Decl->TypeForDecl)
3232     return QualType(Decl->TypeForDecl, 0);
3233 
3234   if (PrevDecl) {
3235     assert(PrevDecl->TypeForDecl && "previous decl has no TypeForDecl");
3236     Decl->TypeForDecl = PrevDecl->TypeForDecl;
3237     return QualType(PrevDecl->TypeForDecl, 0);
3238   }
3239 
3240   // Prefer the definition, if there is one.
3241   if (const ObjCInterfaceDecl *Def = Decl->getDefinition())
3242     Decl = Def;
3243 
3244   void *Mem = Allocate(sizeof(ObjCInterfaceType), TypeAlignment);
3245   ObjCInterfaceType *T = new (Mem) ObjCInterfaceType(Decl);
3246   Decl->TypeForDecl = T;
3247   Types.push_back(T);
3248   return QualType(T, 0);
3249 }
3250 
3251 /// getTypeOfExprType - Unlike many "get<Type>" functions, we can't unique
3252 /// TypeOfExprType AST's (since expression's are never shared). For example,
3253 /// multiple declarations that refer to "typeof(x)" all contain different
3254 /// DeclRefExpr's. This doesn't effect the type checker, since it operates
3255 /// on canonical type's (which are always unique).
getTypeOfExprType(Expr * tofExpr) const3256 QualType ASTContext::getTypeOfExprType(Expr *tofExpr) const {
3257   TypeOfExprType *toe;
3258   if (tofExpr->isTypeDependent()) {
3259     llvm::FoldingSetNodeID ID;
3260     DependentTypeOfExprType::Profile(ID, *this, tofExpr);
3261 
3262     void *InsertPos = 0;
3263     DependentTypeOfExprType *Canon
3264       = DependentTypeOfExprTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos);
3265     if (Canon) {
3266       // We already have a "canonical" version of an identical, dependent
3267       // typeof(expr) type. Use that as our canonical type.
3268       toe = new (*this, TypeAlignment) TypeOfExprType(tofExpr,
3269                                           QualType((TypeOfExprType*)Canon, 0));
3270     } else {
3271       // Build a new, canonical typeof(expr) type.
3272       Canon
3273         = new (*this, TypeAlignment) DependentTypeOfExprType(*this, tofExpr);
3274       DependentTypeOfExprTypes.InsertNode(Canon, InsertPos);
3275       toe = Canon;
3276     }
3277   } else {
3278     QualType Canonical = getCanonicalType(tofExpr->getType());
3279     toe = new (*this, TypeAlignment) TypeOfExprType(tofExpr, Canonical);
3280   }
3281   Types.push_back(toe);
3282   return QualType(toe, 0);
3283 }
3284 
3285 /// getTypeOfType -  Unlike many "get<Type>" functions, we don't unique
3286 /// TypeOfType AST's. The only motivation to unique these nodes would be
3287 /// memory savings. Since typeof(t) is fairly uncommon, space shouldn't be
3288 /// an issue. This doesn't effect the type checker, since it operates
3289 /// on canonical type's (which are always unique).
getTypeOfType(QualType tofType) const3290 QualType ASTContext::getTypeOfType(QualType tofType) const {
3291   QualType Canonical = getCanonicalType(tofType);
3292   TypeOfType *tot = new (*this, TypeAlignment) TypeOfType(tofType, Canonical);
3293   Types.push_back(tot);
3294   return QualType(tot, 0);
3295 }
3296 
3297 
3298 /// getDecltypeType -  Unlike many "get<Type>" functions, we don't unique
3299 /// DecltypeType AST's. The only motivation to unique these nodes would be
3300 /// memory savings. Since decltype(t) is fairly uncommon, space shouldn't be
3301 /// an issue. This doesn't effect the type checker, since it operates
3302 /// on canonical types (which are always unique).
getDecltypeType(Expr * e,QualType UnderlyingType) const3303 QualType ASTContext::getDecltypeType(Expr *e, QualType UnderlyingType) const {
3304   DecltypeType *dt;
3305 
3306   // C++0x [temp.type]p2:
3307   //   If an expression e involves a template parameter, decltype(e) denotes a
3308   //   unique dependent type. Two such decltype-specifiers refer to the same
3309   //   type only if their expressions are equivalent (14.5.6.1).
3310   if (e->isInstantiationDependent()) {
3311     llvm::FoldingSetNodeID ID;
3312     DependentDecltypeType::Profile(ID, *this, e);
3313 
3314     void *InsertPos = 0;
3315     DependentDecltypeType *Canon
3316       = DependentDecltypeTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos);
3317     if (Canon) {
3318       // We already have a "canonical" version of an equivalent, dependent
3319       // decltype type. Use that as our canonical type.
3320       dt = new (*this, TypeAlignment) DecltypeType(e, UnderlyingType,
3321                                        QualType((DecltypeType*)Canon, 0));
3322     } else {
3323       // Build a new, canonical typeof(expr) type.
3324       Canon = new (*this, TypeAlignment) DependentDecltypeType(*this, e);
3325       DependentDecltypeTypes.InsertNode(Canon, InsertPos);
3326       dt = Canon;
3327     }
3328   } else {
3329     dt = new (*this, TypeAlignment) DecltypeType(e, UnderlyingType,
3330                                       getCanonicalType(UnderlyingType));
3331   }
3332   Types.push_back(dt);
3333   return QualType(dt, 0);
3334 }
3335 
3336 /// getUnaryTransformationType - We don't unique these, since the memory
3337 /// savings are minimal and these are rare.
getUnaryTransformType(QualType BaseType,QualType UnderlyingType,UnaryTransformType::UTTKind Kind) const3338 QualType ASTContext::getUnaryTransformType(QualType BaseType,
3339                                            QualType UnderlyingType,
3340                                            UnaryTransformType::UTTKind Kind)
3341     const {
3342   UnaryTransformType *Ty =
3343     new (*this, TypeAlignment) UnaryTransformType (BaseType, UnderlyingType,
3344                                                    Kind,
3345                                  UnderlyingType->isDependentType() ?
3346                                  QualType() : getCanonicalType(UnderlyingType));
3347   Types.push_back(Ty);
3348   return QualType(Ty, 0);
3349 }
3350 
3351 /// getAutoType - We only unique auto types after they've been deduced.
getAutoType(QualType DeducedType) const3352 QualType ASTContext::getAutoType(QualType DeducedType) const {
3353   void *InsertPos = 0;
3354   if (!DeducedType.isNull()) {
3355     // Look in the folding set for an existing type.
3356     llvm::FoldingSetNodeID ID;
3357     AutoType::Profile(ID, DeducedType);
3358     if (AutoType *AT = AutoTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos))
3359       return QualType(AT, 0);
3360   }
3361 
3362   AutoType *AT = new (*this, TypeAlignment) AutoType(DeducedType);
3363   Types.push_back(AT);
3364   if (InsertPos)
3365     AutoTypes.InsertNode(AT, InsertPos);
3366   return QualType(AT, 0);
3367 }
3368 
3369 /// getAtomicType - Return the uniqued reference to the atomic type for
3370 /// the given value type.
getAtomicType(QualType T) const3371 QualType ASTContext::getAtomicType(QualType T) const {
3372   // Unique pointers, to guarantee there is only one pointer of a particular
3373   // structure.
3374   llvm::FoldingSetNodeID ID;
3375   AtomicType::Profile(ID, T);
3376 
3377   void *InsertPos = 0;
3378   if (AtomicType *AT = AtomicTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos))
3379     return QualType(AT, 0);
3380 
3381   // If the atomic value type isn't canonical, this won't be a canonical type
3382   // either, so fill in the canonical type field.
3383   QualType Canonical;
3384   if (!T.isCanonical()) {
3385     Canonical = getAtomicType(getCanonicalType(T));
3386 
3387     // Get the new insert position for the node we care about.
3388     AtomicType *NewIP = AtomicTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos);
3389     assert(NewIP == 0 && "Shouldn't be in the map!"); (void)NewIP;
3390   }
3391   AtomicType *New = new (*this, TypeAlignment) AtomicType(T, Canonical);
3392   Types.push_back(New);
3393   AtomicTypes.InsertNode(New, InsertPos);
3394   return QualType(New, 0);
3395 }
3396 
3397 /// getAutoDeductType - Get type pattern for deducing against 'auto'.
getAutoDeductType() const3398 QualType ASTContext::getAutoDeductType() const {
3399   if (AutoDeductTy.isNull())
3400     AutoDeductTy = getAutoType(QualType());
3401   assert(!AutoDeductTy.isNull() && "can't build 'auto' pattern");
3402   return AutoDeductTy;
3403 }
3404 
3405 /// getAutoRRefDeductType - Get type pattern for deducing against 'auto &&'.
getAutoRRefDeductType() const3406 QualType ASTContext::getAutoRRefDeductType() const {
3407   if (AutoRRefDeductTy.isNull())
3408     AutoRRefDeductTy = getRValueReferenceType(getAutoDeductType());
3409   assert(!AutoRRefDeductTy.isNull() && "can't build 'auto &&' pattern");
3410   return AutoRRefDeductTy;
3411 }
3412 
3413 /// getTagDeclType - Return the unique reference to the type for the
3414 /// specified TagDecl (struct/union/class/enum) decl.
getTagDeclType(const TagDecl * Decl) const3415 QualType ASTContext::getTagDeclType(const TagDecl *Decl) const {
3416   assert (Decl);
3417   // FIXME: What is the design on getTagDeclType when it requires casting
3418   // away const?  mutable?
3419   return getTypeDeclType(const_cast<TagDecl*>(Decl));
3420 }
3421 
3422 /// getSizeType - Return the unique type for "size_t" (C99 7.17), the result
3423 /// of the sizeof operator (C99 6.5.3.4p4). The value is target dependent and
3424 /// needs to agree with the definition in <stddef.h>.
getSizeType() const3425 CanQualType ASTContext::getSizeType() const {
3426   return getFromTargetType(Target->getSizeType());
3427 }
3428 
3429 /// getIntMaxType - Return the unique type for "intmax_t" (C99 7.18.1.5).
getIntMaxType() const3430 CanQualType ASTContext::getIntMaxType() const {
3431   return getFromTargetType(Target->getIntMaxType());
3432 }
3433 
3434 /// getUIntMaxType - Return the unique type for "uintmax_t" (C99 7.18.1.5).
getUIntMaxType() const3435 CanQualType ASTContext::getUIntMaxType() const {
3436   return getFromTargetType(Target->getUIntMaxType());
3437 }
3438 
3439 /// getSignedWCharType - Return the type of "signed wchar_t".
3440 /// Used when in C++, as a GCC extension.
getSignedWCharType() const3441 QualType ASTContext::getSignedWCharType() const {
3442   // FIXME: derive from "Target" ?
3443   return WCharTy;
3444 }
3445 
3446 /// getUnsignedWCharType - Return the type of "unsigned wchar_t".
3447 /// Used when in C++, as a GCC extension.
getUnsignedWCharType() const3448 QualType ASTContext::getUnsignedWCharType() const {
3449   // FIXME: derive from "Target" ?
3450   return UnsignedIntTy;
3451 }
3452 
3453 /// getPointerDiffType - Return the unique type for "ptrdiff_t" (C99 7.17)
3454 /// defined in <stddef.h>. Pointer - pointer requires this (C99 6.5.6p9).
getPointerDiffType() const3455 QualType ASTContext::getPointerDiffType() const {
3456   return getFromTargetType(Target->getPtrDiffType(0));
3457 }
3458 
3459 //===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
3460 //                              Type Operators
3461 //===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
3462 
getCanonicalParamType(QualType T) const3463 CanQualType ASTContext::getCanonicalParamType(QualType T) const {
3464   // Push qualifiers into arrays, and then discard any remaining
3465   // qualifiers.
3466   T = getCanonicalType(T);
3467   T = getVariableArrayDecayedType(T);
3468   const Type *Ty = T.getTypePtr();
3469   QualType Result;
3470   if (isa<ArrayType>(Ty)) {
3471     Result = getArrayDecayedType(QualType(Ty,0));
3472   } else if (isa<FunctionType>(Ty)) {
3473     Result = getPointerType(QualType(Ty, 0));
3474   } else {
3475     Result = QualType(Ty, 0);
3476   }
3477 
3478   return CanQualType::CreateUnsafe(Result);
3479 }
3480 
getUnqualifiedArrayType(QualType type,Qualifiers & quals)3481 QualType ASTContext::getUnqualifiedArrayType(QualType type,
3482                                              Qualifiers &quals) {
3483   SplitQualType splitType = type.getSplitUnqualifiedType();
3484 
3485   // FIXME: getSplitUnqualifiedType() actually walks all the way to
3486   // the unqualified desugared type and then drops it on the floor.
3487   // We then have to strip that sugar back off with
3488   // getUnqualifiedDesugaredType(), which is silly.
3489   const ArrayType *AT =
3490     dyn_cast<ArrayType>(splitType.Ty->getUnqualifiedDesugaredType());
3491 
3492   // If we don't have an array, just use the results in splitType.
3493   if (!AT) {
3494     quals = splitType.Quals;
3495     return QualType(splitType.Ty, 0);
3496   }
3497 
3498   // Otherwise, recurse on the array's element type.
3499   QualType elementType = AT->getElementType();
3500   QualType unqualElementType = getUnqualifiedArrayType(elementType, quals);
3501 
3502   // If that didn't change the element type, AT has no qualifiers, so we
3503   // can just use the results in splitType.
3504   if (elementType == unqualElementType) {
3505     assert(quals.empty()); // from the recursive call
3506     quals = splitType.Quals;
3507     return QualType(splitType.Ty, 0);
3508   }
3509 
3510   // Otherwise, add in the qualifiers from the outermost type, then
3511   // build the type back up.
3512   quals.addConsistentQualifiers(splitType.Quals);
3513 
3514   if (const ConstantArrayType *CAT = dyn_cast<ConstantArrayType>(AT)) {
3515     return getConstantArrayType(unqualElementType, CAT->getSize(),
3516                                 CAT->getSizeModifier(), 0);
3517   }
3518 
3519   if (const IncompleteArrayType *IAT = dyn_cast<IncompleteArrayType>(AT)) {
3520     return getIncompleteArrayType(unqualElementType, IAT->getSizeModifier(), 0);
3521   }
3522 
3523   if (const VariableArrayType *VAT = dyn_cast<VariableArrayType>(AT)) {
3524     return getVariableArrayType(unqualElementType,
3525                                 VAT->getSizeExpr(),
3526                                 VAT->getSizeModifier(),
3527                                 VAT->getIndexTypeCVRQualifiers(),
3528                                 VAT->getBracketsRange());
3529   }
3530 
3531   const DependentSizedArrayType *DSAT = cast<DependentSizedArrayType>(AT);
3532   return getDependentSizedArrayType(unqualElementType, DSAT->getSizeExpr(),
3533                                     DSAT->getSizeModifier(), 0,
3534                                     SourceRange());
3535 }
3536 
3537 /// UnwrapSimilarPointerTypes - If T1 and T2 are pointer types  that
3538 /// may be similar (C++ 4.4), replaces T1 and T2 with the type that
3539 /// they point to and return true. If T1 and T2 aren't pointer types
3540 /// or pointer-to-member types, or if they are not similar at this
3541 /// level, returns false and leaves T1 and T2 unchanged. Top-level
3542 /// qualifiers on T1 and T2 are ignored. This function will typically
3543 /// be called in a loop that successively "unwraps" pointer and
3544 /// pointer-to-member types to compare them at each level.
UnwrapSimilarPointerTypes(QualType & T1,QualType & T2)3545 bool ASTContext::UnwrapSimilarPointerTypes(QualType &T1, QualType &T2) {
3546   const PointerType *T1PtrType = T1->getAs<PointerType>(),
3547                     *T2PtrType = T2->getAs<PointerType>();
3548   if (T1PtrType && T2PtrType) {
3549     T1 = T1PtrType->getPointeeType();
3550     T2 = T2PtrType->getPointeeType();
3551     return true;
3552   }
3553 
3554   const MemberPointerType *T1MPType = T1->getAs<MemberPointerType>(),
3555                           *T2MPType = T2->getAs<MemberPointerType>();
3556   if (T1MPType && T2MPType &&
3557       hasSameUnqualifiedType(QualType(T1MPType->getClass(), 0),
3558                              QualType(T2MPType->getClass(), 0))) {
3559     T1 = T1MPType->getPointeeType();
3560     T2 = T2MPType->getPointeeType();
3561     return true;
3562   }
3563 
3564   if (getLangOpts().ObjC1) {
3565     const ObjCObjectPointerType *T1OPType = T1->getAs<ObjCObjectPointerType>(),
3566                                 *T2OPType = T2->getAs<ObjCObjectPointerType>();
3567     if (T1OPType && T2OPType) {
3568       T1 = T1OPType->getPointeeType();
3569       T2 = T2OPType->getPointeeType();
3570       return true;
3571     }
3572   }
3573 
3574   // FIXME: Block pointers, too?
3575 
3576   return false;
3577 }
3578 
3579 DeclarationNameInfo
getNameForTemplate(TemplateName Name,SourceLocation NameLoc) const3580 ASTContext::getNameForTemplate(TemplateName Name,
3581                                SourceLocation NameLoc) const {
3582   switch (Name.getKind()) {
3583   case TemplateName::QualifiedTemplate:
3584   case TemplateName::Template:
3585     // DNInfo work in progress: CHECKME: what about DNLoc?
3586     return DeclarationNameInfo(Name.getAsTemplateDecl()->getDeclName(),
3587                                NameLoc);
3588 
3589   case TemplateName::OverloadedTemplate: {
3590     OverloadedTemplateStorage *Storage = Name.getAsOverloadedTemplate();
3591     // DNInfo work in progress: CHECKME: what about DNLoc?
3592     return DeclarationNameInfo((*Storage->begin())->getDeclName(), NameLoc);
3593   }
3594 
3595   case TemplateName::DependentTemplate: {
3596     DependentTemplateName *DTN = Name.getAsDependentTemplateName();
3597     DeclarationName DName;
3598     if (DTN->isIdentifier()) {
3599       DName = DeclarationNames.getIdentifier(DTN->getIdentifier());
3600       return DeclarationNameInfo(DName, NameLoc);
3601     } else {
3602       DName = DeclarationNames.getCXXOperatorName(DTN->getOperator());
3603       // DNInfo work in progress: FIXME: source locations?
3604       DeclarationNameLoc DNLoc;
3605       DNLoc.CXXOperatorName.BeginOpNameLoc = SourceLocation().getRawEncoding();
3606       DNLoc.CXXOperatorName.EndOpNameLoc = SourceLocation().getRawEncoding();
3607       return DeclarationNameInfo(DName, NameLoc, DNLoc);
3608     }
3609   }
3610 
3611   case TemplateName::SubstTemplateTemplateParm: {
3612     SubstTemplateTemplateParmStorage *subst
3613       = Name.getAsSubstTemplateTemplateParm();
3614     return DeclarationNameInfo(subst->getParameter()->getDeclName(),
3615                                NameLoc);
3616   }
3617 
3618   case TemplateName::SubstTemplateTemplateParmPack: {
3619     SubstTemplateTemplateParmPackStorage *subst
3620       = Name.getAsSubstTemplateTemplateParmPack();
3621     return DeclarationNameInfo(subst->getParameterPack()->getDeclName(),
3622                                NameLoc);
3623   }
3624   }
3625 
3626   llvm_unreachable("bad template name kind!");
3627 }
3628 
getCanonicalTemplateName(TemplateName Name) const3629 TemplateName ASTContext::getCanonicalTemplateName(TemplateName Name) const {
3630   switch (Name.getKind()) {
3631   case TemplateName::QualifiedTemplate:
3632   case TemplateName::Template: {
3633     TemplateDecl *Template = Name.getAsTemplateDecl();
3634     if (TemplateTemplateParmDecl *TTP
3635           = dyn_cast<TemplateTemplateParmDecl>(Template))
3636       Template = getCanonicalTemplateTemplateParmDecl(TTP);
3637 
3638     // The canonical template name is the canonical template declaration.
3639     return TemplateName(cast<TemplateDecl>(Template->getCanonicalDecl()));
3640   }
3641 
3642   case TemplateName::OverloadedTemplate:
3643     llvm_unreachable("cannot canonicalize overloaded template");
3644 
3645   case TemplateName::DependentTemplate: {
3646     DependentTemplateName *DTN = Name.getAsDependentTemplateName();
3647     assert(DTN && "Non-dependent template names must refer to template decls.");
3648     return DTN->CanonicalTemplateName;
3649   }
3650 
3651   case TemplateName::SubstTemplateTemplateParm: {
3652     SubstTemplateTemplateParmStorage *subst
3653       = Name.getAsSubstTemplateTemplateParm();
3654     return getCanonicalTemplateName(subst->getReplacement());
3655   }
3656 
3657   case TemplateName::SubstTemplateTemplateParmPack: {
3658     SubstTemplateTemplateParmPackStorage *subst
3659                                   = Name.getAsSubstTemplateTemplateParmPack();
3660     TemplateTemplateParmDecl *canonParameter
3661       = getCanonicalTemplateTemplateParmDecl(subst->getParameterPack());
3662     TemplateArgument canonArgPack
3663       = getCanonicalTemplateArgument(subst->getArgumentPack());
3664     return getSubstTemplateTemplateParmPack(canonParameter, canonArgPack);
3665   }
3666   }
3667 
3668   llvm_unreachable("bad template name!");
3669 }
3670 
hasSameTemplateName(TemplateName X,TemplateName Y)3671 bool ASTContext::hasSameTemplateName(TemplateName X, TemplateName Y) {
3672   X = getCanonicalTemplateName(X);
3673   Y = getCanonicalTemplateName(Y);
3674   return X.getAsVoidPointer() == Y.getAsVoidPointer();
3675 }
3676 
3677 TemplateArgument
getCanonicalTemplateArgument(const TemplateArgument & Arg) const3678 ASTContext::getCanonicalTemplateArgument(const TemplateArgument &Arg) const {
3679   switch (Arg.getKind()) {
3680     case TemplateArgument::Null:
3681       return Arg;
3682 
3683     case TemplateArgument::Expression:
3684       return Arg;
3685 
3686     case TemplateArgument::Declaration: {
3687       if (Decl *D = Arg.getAsDecl())
3688           return TemplateArgument(D->getCanonicalDecl());
3689       return TemplateArgument((Decl*)0);
3690     }
3691 
3692     case TemplateArgument::Template:
3693       return TemplateArgument(getCanonicalTemplateName(Arg.getAsTemplate()));
3694 
3695     case TemplateArgument::TemplateExpansion:
3696       return TemplateArgument(getCanonicalTemplateName(
3697                                          Arg.getAsTemplateOrTemplatePattern()),
3698                               Arg.getNumTemplateExpansions());
3699 
3700     case TemplateArgument::Integral:
3701       return TemplateArgument(Arg, getCanonicalType(Arg.getIntegralType()));
3702 
3703     case TemplateArgument::Type:
3704       return TemplateArgument(getCanonicalType(Arg.getAsType()));
3705 
3706     case TemplateArgument::Pack: {
3707       if (Arg.pack_size() == 0)
3708         return Arg;
3709 
3710       TemplateArgument *CanonArgs
3711         = new (*this) TemplateArgument[Arg.pack_size()];
3712       unsigned Idx = 0;
3713       for (TemplateArgument::pack_iterator A = Arg.pack_begin(),
3714                                         AEnd = Arg.pack_end();
3715            A != AEnd; (void)++A, ++Idx)
3716         CanonArgs[Idx] = getCanonicalTemplateArgument(*A);
3717 
3718       return TemplateArgument(CanonArgs, Arg.pack_size());
3719     }
3720   }
3721 
3722   // Silence GCC warning
3723   llvm_unreachable("Unhandled template argument kind");
3724 }
3725 
3726 NestedNameSpecifier *
getCanonicalNestedNameSpecifier(NestedNameSpecifier * NNS) const3727 ASTContext::getCanonicalNestedNameSpecifier(NestedNameSpecifier *NNS) const {
3728   if (!NNS)
3729     return 0;
3730 
3731   switch (NNS->getKind()) {
3732   case NestedNameSpecifier::Identifier:
3733     // Canonicalize the prefix but keep the identifier the same.
3734     return NestedNameSpecifier::Create(*this,
3735                          getCanonicalNestedNameSpecifier(NNS->getPrefix()),
3736                                        NNS->getAsIdentifier());
3737 
3738   case NestedNameSpecifier::Namespace:
3739     // A namespace is canonical; build a nested-name-specifier with
3740     // this namespace and no prefix.
3741     return NestedNameSpecifier::Create(*this, 0,
3742                                  NNS->getAsNamespace()->getOriginalNamespace());
3743 
3744   case NestedNameSpecifier::NamespaceAlias:
3745     // A namespace is canonical; build a nested-name-specifier with
3746     // this namespace and no prefix.
3747     return NestedNameSpecifier::Create(*this, 0,
3748                                     NNS->getAsNamespaceAlias()->getNamespace()
3749                                                       ->getOriginalNamespace());
3750 
3751   case NestedNameSpecifier::TypeSpec:
3752   case NestedNameSpecifier::TypeSpecWithTemplate: {
3753     QualType T = getCanonicalType(QualType(NNS->getAsType(), 0));
3754 
3755     // If we have some kind of dependent-named type (e.g., "typename T::type"),
3756     // break it apart into its prefix and identifier, then reconsititute those
3757     // as the canonical nested-name-specifier. This is required to canonicalize
3758     // a dependent nested-name-specifier involving typedefs of dependent-name
3759     // types, e.g.,
3760     //   typedef typename T::type T1;
3761     //   typedef typename T1::type T2;
3762     if (const DependentNameType *DNT = T->getAs<DependentNameType>())
3763       return NestedNameSpecifier::Create(*this, DNT->getQualifier(),
3764                            const_cast<IdentifierInfo *>(DNT->getIdentifier()));
3765 
3766     // Otherwise, just canonicalize the type, and force it to be a TypeSpec.
3767     // FIXME: Why are TypeSpec and TypeSpecWithTemplate distinct in the
3768     // first place?
3769     return NestedNameSpecifier::Create(*this, 0, false,
3770                                        const_cast<Type*>(T.getTypePtr()));
3771   }
3772 
3773   case NestedNameSpecifier::Global:
3774     // The global specifier is canonical and unique.
3775     return NNS;
3776   }
3777 
3778   llvm_unreachable("Invalid NestedNameSpecifier::Kind!");
3779 }
3780 
3781 
getAsArrayType(QualType T) const3782 const ArrayType *ASTContext::getAsArrayType(QualType T) const {
3783   // Handle the non-qualified case efficiently.
3784   if (!T.hasLocalQualifiers()) {
3785     // Handle the common positive case fast.
3786     if (const ArrayType *AT = dyn_cast<ArrayType>(T))
3787       return AT;
3788   }
3789 
3790   // Handle the common negative case fast.
3791   if (!isa<ArrayType>(T.getCanonicalType()))
3792     return 0;
3793 
3794   // Apply any qualifiers from the array type to the element type.  This
3795   // implements C99 6.7.3p8: "If the specification of an array type includes
3796   // any type qualifiers, the element type is so qualified, not the array type."
3797 
3798   // If we get here, we either have type qualifiers on the type, or we have
3799   // sugar such as a typedef in the way.  If we have type qualifiers on the type
3800   // we must propagate them down into the element type.
3801 
3802   SplitQualType split = T.getSplitDesugaredType();
3803   Qualifiers qs = split.Quals;
3804 
3805   // If we have a simple case, just return now.
3806   const ArrayType *ATy = dyn_cast<ArrayType>(split.Ty);
3807   if (ATy == 0 || qs.empty())
3808     return ATy;
3809 
3810   // Otherwise, we have an array and we have qualifiers on it.  Push the
3811   // qualifiers into the array element type and return a new array type.
3812   QualType NewEltTy = getQualifiedType(ATy->getElementType(), qs);
3813 
3814   if (const ConstantArrayType *CAT = dyn_cast<ConstantArrayType>(ATy))
3815     return cast<ArrayType>(getConstantArrayType(NewEltTy, CAT->getSize(),
3816                                                 CAT->getSizeModifier(),
3817                                            CAT->getIndexTypeCVRQualifiers()));
3818   if (const IncompleteArrayType *IAT = dyn_cast<IncompleteArrayType>(ATy))
3819     return cast<ArrayType>(getIncompleteArrayType(NewEltTy,
3820                                                   IAT->getSizeModifier(),
3821                                            IAT->getIndexTypeCVRQualifiers()));
3822 
3823   if (const DependentSizedArrayType *DSAT
3824         = dyn_cast<DependentSizedArrayType>(ATy))
3825     return cast<ArrayType>(
3826                      getDependentSizedArrayType(NewEltTy,
3827                                                 DSAT->getSizeExpr(),
3828                                                 DSAT->getSizeModifier(),
3829                                               DSAT->getIndexTypeCVRQualifiers(),
3830                                                 DSAT->getBracketsRange()));
3831 
3832   const VariableArrayType *VAT = cast<VariableArrayType>(ATy);
3833   return cast<ArrayType>(getVariableArrayType(NewEltTy,
3834                                               VAT->getSizeExpr(),
3835                                               VAT->getSizeModifier(),
3836                                               VAT->getIndexTypeCVRQualifiers(),
3837                                               VAT->getBracketsRange()));
3838 }
3839 
getAdjustedParameterType(QualType T) const3840 QualType ASTContext::getAdjustedParameterType(QualType T) const {
3841   // C99 6.7.5.3p7:
3842   //   A declaration of a parameter as "array of type" shall be
3843   //   adjusted to "qualified pointer to type", where the type
3844   //   qualifiers (if any) are those specified within the [ and ] of
3845   //   the array type derivation.
3846   if (T->isArrayType())
3847     return getArrayDecayedType(T);
3848 
3849   // C99 6.7.5.3p8:
3850   //   A declaration of a parameter as "function returning type"
3851   //   shall be adjusted to "pointer to function returning type", as
3852   //   in 6.3.2.1.
3853   if (T->isFunctionType())
3854     return getPointerType(T);
3855 
3856   return T;
3857 }
3858 
getSignatureParameterType(QualType T) const3859 QualType ASTContext::getSignatureParameterType(QualType T) const {
3860   T = getVariableArrayDecayedType(T);
3861   T = getAdjustedParameterType(T);
3862   return T.getUnqualifiedType();
3863 }
3864 
3865 /// getArrayDecayedType - Return the properly qualified result of decaying the
3866 /// specified array type to a pointer.  This operation is non-trivial when
3867 /// handling typedefs etc.  The canonical type of "T" must be an array type,
3868 /// this returns a pointer to a properly qualified element of the array.
3869 ///
3870 /// See C99 6.7.5.3p7 and C99 6.3.2.1p3.
getArrayDecayedType(QualType Ty) const3871 QualType ASTContext::getArrayDecayedType(QualType Ty) const {
3872   // Get the element type with 'getAsArrayType' so that we don't lose any
3873   // typedefs in the element type of the array.  This also handles propagation
3874   // of type qualifiers from the array type into the element type if present
3875   // (C99 6.7.3p8).
3876   const ArrayType *PrettyArrayType = getAsArrayType(Ty);
3877   assert(PrettyArrayType && "Not an array type!");
3878 
3879   QualType PtrTy = getPointerType(PrettyArrayType->getElementType());
3880 
3881   // int x[restrict 4] ->  int *restrict
3882   return getQualifiedType(PtrTy, PrettyArrayType->getIndexTypeQualifiers());
3883 }
3884 
getBaseElementType(const ArrayType * array) const3885 QualType ASTContext::getBaseElementType(const ArrayType *array) const {
3886   return getBaseElementType(array->getElementType());
3887 }
3888 
getBaseElementType(QualType type) const3889 QualType ASTContext::getBaseElementType(QualType type) const {
3890   Qualifiers qs;
3891   while (true) {
3892     SplitQualType split = type.getSplitDesugaredType();
3893     const ArrayType *array = split.Ty->getAsArrayTypeUnsafe();
3894     if (!array) break;
3895 
3896     type = array->getElementType();
3897     qs.addConsistentQualifiers(split.Quals);
3898   }
3899 
3900   return getQualifiedType(type, qs);
3901 }
3902 
3903 /// getConstantArrayElementCount - Returns number of constant array elements.
3904 uint64_t
getConstantArrayElementCount(const ConstantArrayType * CA) const3905 ASTContext::getConstantArrayElementCount(const ConstantArrayType *CA)  const {
3906   uint64_t ElementCount = 1;
3907   do {
3908     ElementCount *= CA->getSize().getZExtValue();
3909     CA = dyn_cast<ConstantArrayType>(CA->getElementType());
3910   } while (CA);
3911   return ElementCount;
3912 }
3913 
3914 /// getFloatingRank - Return a relative rank for floating point types.
3915 /// This routine will assert if passed a built-in type that isn't a float.
getFloatingRank(QualType T)3916 static FloatingRank getFloatingRank(QualType T) {
3917   if (const ComplexType *CT = T->getAs<ComplexType>())
3918     return getFloatingRank(CT->getElementType());
3919 
3920   assert(T->getAs<BuiltinType>() && "getFloatingRank(): not a floating type");
3921   switch (T->getAs<BuiltinType>()->getKind()) {
3922   default: llvm_unreachable("getFloatingRank(): not a floating type");
3923   case BuiltinType::Half:       return HalfRank;
3924   case BuiltinType::Float:      return FloatRank;
3925   case BuiltinType::Double:     return DoubleRank;
3926   case BuiltinType::LongDouble: return LongDoubleRank;
3927   }
3928 }
3929 
3930 /// getFloatingTypeOfSizeWithinDomain - Returns a real floating
3931 /// point or a complex type (based on typeDomain/typeSize).
3932 /// 'typeDomain' is a real floating point or complex type.
3933 /// 'typeSize' is a real floating point or complex type.
getFloatingTypeOfSizeWithinDomain(QualType Size,QualType Domain) const3934 QualType ASTContext::getFloatingTypeOfSizeWithinDomain(QualType Size,
3935                                                        QualType Domain) const {
3936   FloatingRank EltRank = getFloatingRank(Size);
3937   if (Domain->isComplexType()) {
3938     switch (EltRank) {
3939     case HalfRank: llvm_unreachable("Complex half is not supported");
3940     case FloatRank:      return FloatComplexTy;
3941     case DoubleRank:     return DoubleComplexTy;
3942     case LongDoubleRank: return LongDoubleComplexTy;
3943     }
3944   }
3945 
3946   assert(Domain->isRealFloatingType() && "Unknown domain!");
3947   switch (EltRank) {
3948   case HalfRank: llvm_unreachable("Half ranks are not valid here");
3949   case FloatRank:      return FloatTy;
3950   case DoubleRank:     return DoubleTy;
3951   case LongDoubleRank: return LongDoubleTy;
3952   }
3953   llvm_unreachable("getFloatingRank(): illegal value for rank");
3954 }
3955 
3956 /// getFloatingTypeOrder - Compare the rank of the two specified floating
3957 /// point types, ignoring the domain of the type (i.e. 'double' ==
3958 /// '_Complex double').  If LHS > RHS, return 1.  If LHS == RHS, return 0. If
3959 /// LHS < RHS, return -1.
getFloatingTypeOrder(QualType LHS,QualType RHS) const3960 int ASTContext::getFloatingTypeOrder(QualType LHS, QualType RHS) const {
3961   FloatingRank LHSR = getFloatingRank(LHS);
3962   FloatingRank RHSR = getFloatingRank(RHS);
3963 
3964   if (LHSR == RHSR)
3965     return 0;
3966   if (LHSR > RHSR)
3967     return 1;
3968   return -1;
3969 }
3970 
3971 /// getIntegerRank - Return an integer conversion rank (C99 6.3.1.1p1). This
3972 /// routine will assert if passed a built-in type that isn't an integer or enum,
3973 /// or if it is not canonicalized.
getIntegerRank(const Type * T) const3974 unsigned ASTContext::getIntegerRank(const Type *T) const {
3975   assert(T->isCanonicalUnqualified() && "T should be canonicalized");
3976 
3977   switch (cast<BuiltinType>(T)->getKind()) {
3978   default: llvm_unreachable("getIntegerRank(): not a built-in integer");
3979   case BuiltinType::Bool:
3980     return 1 + (getIntWidth(BoolTy) << 3);
3981   case BuiltinType::Char_S:
3982   case BuiltinType::Char_U:
3983   case BuiltinType::SChar:
3984   case BuiltinType::UChar:
3985     return 2 + (getIntWidth(CharTy) << 3);
3986   case BuiltinType::Short:
3987   case BuiltinType::UShort:
3988     return 3 + (getIntWidth(ShortTy) << 3);
3989   case BuiltinType::Int:
3990   case BuiltinType::UInt:
3991     return 4 + (getIntWidth(IntTy) << 3);
3992   case BuiltinType::Long:
3993   case BuiltinType::ULong:
3994     return 5 + (getIntWidth(LongTy) << 3);
3995   case BuiltinType::LongLong:
3996   case BuiltinType::ULongLong:
3997     return 6 + (getIntWidth(LongLongTy) << 3);
3998   case BuiltinType::Int128:
3999   case BuiltinType::UInt128:
4000     return 7 + (getIntWidth(Int128Ty) << 3);
4001   }
4002 }
4003 
4004 /// \brief Whether this is a promotable bitfield reference according
4005 /// to C99 6.3.1.1p2, bullet 2 (and GCC extensions).
4006 ///
4007 /// \returns the type this bit-field will promote to, or NULL if no
4008 /// promotion occurs.
isPromotableBitField(Expr * E) const4009 QualType ASTContext::isPromotableBitField(Expr *E) const {
4010   if (E->isTypeDependent() || E->isValueDependent())
4011     return QualType();
4012 
4013   FieldDecl *Field = E->getBitField();
4014   if (!Field)
4015     return QualType();
4016 
4017   QualType FT = Field->getType();
4018 
4019   uint64_t BitWidth = Field->getBitWidthValue(*this);
4020   uint64_t IntSize = getTypeSize(IntTy);
4021   // GCC extension compatibility: if the bit-field size is less than or equal
4022   // to the size of int, it gets promoted no matter what its type is.
4023   // For instance, unsigned long bf : 4 gets promoted to signed int.
4024   if (BitWidth < IntSize)
4025     return IntTy;
4026 
4027   if (BitWidth == IntSize)
4028     return FT->isSignedIntegerType() ? IntTy : UnsignedIntTy;
4029 
4030   // Types bigger than int are not subject to promotions, and therefore act
4031   // like the base type.
4032   // FIXME: This doesn't quite match what gcc does, but what gcc does here
4033   // is ridiculous.
4034   return QualType();
4035 }
4036 
4037 /// getPromotedIntegerType - Returns the type that Promotable will
4038 /// promote to: C99 6.3.1.1p2, assuming that Promotable is a promotable
4039 /// integer type.
getPromotedIntegerType(QualType Promotable) const4040 QualType ASTContext::getPromotedIntegerType(QualType Promotable) const {
4041   assert(!Promotable.isNull());
4042   assert(Promotable->isPromotableIntegerType());
4043   if (const EnumType *ET = Promotable->getAs<EnumType>())
4044     return ET->getDecl()->getPromotionType();
4045 
4046   if (const BuiltinType *BT = Promotable->getAs<BuiltinType>()) {
4047     // C++ [conv.prom]: A prvalue of type char16_t, char32_t, or wchar_t
4048     // (3.9.1) can be converted to a prvalue of the first of the following
4049     // types that can represent all the values of its underlying type:
4050     // int, unsigned int, long int, unsigned long int, long long int, or
4051     // unsigned long long int [...]
4052     // FIXME: Is there some better way to compute this?
4053     if (BT->getKind() == BuiltinType::WChar_S ||
4054         BT->getKind() == BuiltinType::WChar_U ||
4055         BT->getKind() == BuiltinType::Char16 ||
4056         BT->getKind() == BuiltinType::Char32) {
4057       bool FromIsSigned = BT->getKind() == BuiltinType::WChar_S;
4058       uint64_t FromSize = getTypeSize(BT);
4059       QualType PromoteTypes[] = { IntTy, UnsignedIntTy, LongTy, UnsignedLongTy,
4060                                   LongLongTy, UnsignedLongLongTy };
4061       for (size_t Idx = 0; Idx < llvm::array_lengthof(PromoteTypes); ++Idx) {
4062         uint64_t ToSize = getTypeSize(PromoteTypes[Idx]);
4063         if (FromSize < ToSize ||
4064             (FromSize == ToSize &&
4065              FromIsSigned == PromoteTypes[Idx]->isSignedIntegerType()))
4066           return PromoteTypes[Idx];
4067       }
4068       llvm_unreachable("char type should fit into long long");
4069     }
4070   }
4071 
4072   // At this point, we should have a signed or unsigned integer type.
4073   if (Promotable->isSignedIntegerType())
4074     return IntTy;
4075   uint64_t PromotableSize = getTypeSize(Promotable);
4076   uint64_t IntSize = getTypeSize(IntTy);
4077   assert(Promotable->isUnsignedIntegerType() && PromotableSize <= IntSize);
4078   return (PromotableSize != IntSize) ? IntTy : UnsignedIntTy;
4079 }
4080 
4081 /// \brief Recurses in pointer/array types until it finds an objc retainable
4082 /// type and returns its ownership.
getInnerObjCOwnership(QualType T) const4083 Qualifiers::ObjCLifetime ASTContext::getInnerObjCOwnership(QualType T) const {
4084   while (!T.isNull()) {
4085     if (T.getObjCLifetime() != Qualifiers::OCL_None)
4086       return T.getObjCLifetime();
4087     if (T->isArrayType())
4088       T = getBaseElementType(T);
4089     else if (const PointerType *PT = T->getAs<PointerType>())
4090       T = PT->getPointeeType();
4091     else if (const ReferenceType *RT = T->getAs<ReferenceType>())
4092       T = RT->getPointeeType();
4093     else
4094       break;
4095   }
4096 
4097   return Qualifiers::OCL_None;
4098 }
4099 
4100 /// getIntegerTypeOrder - Returns the highest ranked integer type:
4101 /// C99 6.3.1.8p1.  If LHS > RHS, return 1.  If LHS == RHS, return 0. If
4102 /// LHS < RHS, return -1.
getIntegerTypeOrder(QualType LHS,QualType RHS) const4103 int ASTContext::getIntegerTypeOrder(QualType LHS, QualType RHS) const {
4104   const Type *LHSC = getCanonicalType(LHS).getTypePtr();
4105   const Type *RHSC = getCanonicalType(RHS).getTypePtr();
4106   if (LHSC == RHSC) return 0;
4107 
4108   bool LHSUnsigned = LHSC->isUnsignedIntegerType();
4109   bool RHSUnsigned = RHSC->isUnsignedIntegerType();
4110 
4111   unsigned LHSRank = getIntegerRank(LHSC);
4112   unsigned RHSRank = getIntegerRank(RHSC);
4113 
4114   if (LHSUnsigned == RHSUnsigned) {  // Both signed or both unsigned.
4115     if (LHSRank == RHSRank) return 0;
4116     return LHSRank > RHSRank ? 1 : -1;
4117   }
4118 
4119   // Otherwise, the LHS is signed and the RHS is unsigned or visa versa.
4120   if (LHSUnsigned) {
4121     // If the unsigned [LHS] type is larger, return it.
4122     if (LHSRank >= RHSRank)
4123       return 1;
4124 
4125     // If the signed type can represent all values of the unsigned type, it
4126     // wins.  Because we are dealing with 2's complement and types that are
4127     // powers of two larger than each other, this is always safe.
4128     return -1;
4129   }
4130 
4131   // If the unsigned [RHS] type is larger, return it.
4132   if (RHSRank >= LHSRank)
4133     return -1;
4134 
4135   // If the signed type can represent all values of the unsigned type, it
4136   // wins.  Because we are dealing with 2's complement and types that are
4137   // powers of two larger than each other, this is always safe.
4138   return 1;
4139 }
4140 
4141 static RecordDecl *
CreateRecordDecl(const ASTContext & Ctx,RecordDecl::TagKind TK,DeclContext * DC,IdentifierInfo * Id)4142 CreateRecordDecl(const ASTContext &Ctx, RecordDecl::TagKind TK,
4143                  DeclContext *DC, IdentifierInfo *Id) {
4144   SourceLocation Loc;
4145   if (Ctx.getLangOpts().CPlusPlus)
4146     return CXXRecordDecl::Create(Ctx, TK, DC, Loc, Loc, Id);
4147   else
4148     return RecordDecl::Create(Ctx, TK, DC, Loc, Loc, Id);
4149 }
4150 
4151 // getCFConstantStringType - Return the type used for constant CFStrings.
getCFConstantStringType() const4152 QualType ASTContext::getCFConstantStringType() const {
4153   if (!CFConstantStringTypeDecl) {
4154     CFConstantStringTypeDecl =
4155       CreateRecordDecl(*this, TTK_Struct, TUDecl,
4156                        &Idents.get("NSConstantString"));
4157     CFConstantStringTypeDecl->startDefinition();
4158 
4159     QualType FieldTypes[4];
4160 
4161     // const int *isa;
4162     FieldTypes[0] = getPointerType(IntTy.withConst());
4163     // int flags;
4164     FieldTypes[1] = IntTy;
4165     // const char *str;
4166     FieldTypes[2] = getPointerType(CharTy.withConst());
4167     // long length;
4168     FieldTypes[3] = LongTy;
4169 
4170     // Create fields
4171     for (unsigned i = 0; i < 4; ++i) {
4172       FieldDecl *Field = FieldDecl::Create(*this, CFConstantStringTypeDecl,
4173                                            SourceLocation(),
4174                                            SourceLocation(), 0,
4175                                            FieldTypes[i], /*TInfo=*/0,
4176                                            /*BitWidth=*/0,
4177                                            /*Mutable=*/false,
4178                                            ICIS_NoInit);
4179       Field->setAccess(AS_public);
4180       CFConstantStringTypeDecl->addDecl(Field);
4181     }
4182 
4183     CFConstantStringTypeDecl->completeDefinition();
4184   }
4185 
4186   return getTagDeclType(CFConstantStringTypeDecl);
4187 }
4188 
setCFConstantStringType(QualType T)4189 void ASTContext::setCFConstantStringType(QualType T) {
4190   const RecordType *Rec = T->getAs<RecordType>();
4191   assert(Rec && "Invalid CFConstantStringType");
4192   CFConstantStringTypeDecl = Rec->getDecl();
4193 }
4194 
getBlockDescriptorType() const4195 QualType ASTContext::getBlockDescriptorType() const {
4196   if (BlockDescriptorType)
4197     return getTagDeclType(BlockDescriptorType);
4198 
4199   RecordDecl *T;
4200   // FIXME: Needs the FlagAppleBlock bit.
4201   T = CreateRecordDecl(*this, TTK_Struct, TUDecl,
4202                        &Idents.get("__block_descriptor"));
4203   T->startDefinition();
4204 
4205   QualType FieldTypes[] = {
4206     UnsignedLongTy,
4207     UnsignedLongTy,
4208   };
4209 
4210   const char *FieldNames[] = {
4211     "reserved",
4212     "Size"
4213   };
4214 
4215   for (size_t i = 0; i < 2; ++i) {
4216     FieldDecl *Field = FieldDecl::Create(*this, T, SourceLocation(),
4217                                          SourceLocation(),
4218                                          &Idents.get(FieldNames[i]),
4219                                          FieldTypes[i], /*TInfo=*/0,
4220                                          /*BitWidth=*/0,
4221                                          /*Mutable=*/false,
4222                                          ICIS_NoInit);
4223     Field->setAccess(AS_public);
4224     T->addDecl(Field);
4225   }
4226 
4227   T->completeDefinition();
4228 
4229   BlockDescriptorType = T;
4230 
4231   return getTagDeclType(BlockDescriptorType);
4232 }
4233 
getBlockDescriptorExtendedType() const4234 QualType ASTContext::getBlockDescriptorExtendedType() const {
4235   if (BlockDescriptorExtendedType)
4236     return getTagDeclType(BlockDescriptorExtendedType);
4237 
4238   RecordDecl *T;
4239   // FIXME: Needs the FlagAppleBlock bit.
4240   T = CreateRecordDecl(*this, TTK_Struct, TUDecl,
4241                        &Idents.get("__block_descriptor_withcopydispose"));
4242   T->startDefinition();
4243 
4244   QualType FieldTypes[] = {
4245     UnsignedLongTy,
4246     UnsignedLongTy,
4247     getPointerType(VoidPtrTy),
4248     getPointerType(VoidPtrTy)
4249   };
4250 
4251   const char *FieldNames[] = {
4252     "reserved",
4253     "Size",
4254     "CopyFuncPtr",
4255     "DestroyFuncPtr"
4256   };
4257 
4258   for (size_t i = 0; i < 4; ++i) {
4259     FieldDecl *Field = FieldDecl::Create(*this, T, SourceLocation(),
4260                                          SourceLocation(),
4261                                          &Idents.get(FieldNames[i]),
4262                                          FieldTypes[i], /*TInfo=*/0,
4263                                          /*BitWidth=*/0,
4264                                          /*Mutable=*/false,
4265                                          ICIS_NoInit);
4266     Field->setAccess(AS_public);
4267     T->addDecl(Field);
4268   }
4269 
4270   T->completeDefinition();
4271 
4272   BlockDescriptorExtendedType = T;
4273 
4274   return getTagDeclType(BlockDescriptorExtendedType);
4275 }
4276 
BlockRequiresCopying(QualType Ty) const4277 bool ASTContext::BlockRequiresCopying(QualType Ty) const {
4278   if (Ty->isObjCRetainableType())
4279     return true;
4280   if (getLangOpts().CPlusPlus) {
4281     if (const RecordType *RT = Ty->getAs<RecordType>()) {
4282       CXXRecordDecl *RD = cast<CXXRecordDecl>(RT->getDecl());
4283       return RD->hasConstCopyConstructor();
4284 
4285     }
4286   }
4287   return false;
4288 }
4289 
4290 QualType
BuildByRefType(StringRef DeclName,QualType Ty) const4291 ASTContext::BuildByRefType(StringRef DeclName, QualType Ty) const {
4292   //  type = struct __Block_byref_1_X {
4293   //    void *__isa;
4294   //    struct __Block_byref_1_X *__forwarding;
4295   //    unsigned int __flags;
4296   //    unsigned int __size;
4297   //    void *__copy_helper;            // as needed
4298   //    void *__destroy_help            // as needed
4299   //    int X;
4300   //  } *
4301 
4302   bool HasCopyAndDispose = BlockRequiresCopying(Ty);
4303 
4304   // FIXME: Move up
4305   SmallString<36> Name;
4306   llvm::raw_svector_ostream(Name) << "__Block_byref_" <<
4307                                   ++UniqueBlockByRefTypeID << '_' << DeclName;
4308   RecordDecl *T;
4309   T = CreateRecordDecl(*this, TTK_Struct, TUDecl, &Idents.get(Name.str()));
4310   T->startDefinition();
4311   QualType Int32Ty = IntTy;
4312   assert(getIntWidth(IntTy) == 32 && "non-32bit int not supported");
4313   QualType FieldTypes[] = {
4314     getPointerType(VoidPtrTy),
4315     getPointerType(getTagDeclType(T)),
4316     Int32Ty,
4317     Int32Ty,
4318     getPointerType(VoidPtrTy),
4319     getPointerType(VoidPtrTy),
4320     Ty
4321   };
4322 
4323   StringRef FieldNames[] = {
4324     "__isa",
4325     "__forwarding",
4326     "__flags",
4327     "__size",
4328     "__copy_helper",
4329     "__destroy_helper",
4330     DeclName,
4331   };
4332 
4333   for (size_t i = 0; i < 7; ++i) {
4334     if (!HasCopyAndDispose && i >=4 && i <= 5)
4335       continue;
4336     FieldDecl *Field = FieldDecl::Create(*this, T, SourceLocation(),
4337                                          SourceLocation(),
4338                                          &Idents.get(FieldNames[i]),
4339                                          FieldTypes[i], /*TInfo=*/0,
4340                                          /*BitWidth=*/0, /*Mutable=*/false,
4341                                          ICIS_NoInit);
4342     Field->setAccess(AS_public);
4343     T->addDecl(Field);
4344   }
4345 
4346   T->completeDefinition();
4347 
4348   return getPointerType(getTagDeclType(T));
4349 }
4350 
getObjCInstanceTypeDecl()4351 TypedefDecl *ASTContext::getObjCInstanceTypeDecl() {
4352   if (!ObjCInstanceTypeDecl)
4353     ObjCInstanceTypeDecl = TypedefDecl::Create(*this,
4354                                                getTranslationUnitDecl(),
4355                                                SourceLocation(),
4356                                                SourceLocation(),
4357                                                &Idents.get("instancetype"),
4358                                      getTrivialTypeSourceInfo(getObjCIdType()));
4359   return ObjCInstanceTypeDecl;
4360 }
4361 
4362 // This returns true if a type has been typedefed to BOOL:
4363 // typedef <type> BOOL;
isTypeTypedefedAsBOOL(QualType T)4364 static bool isTypeTypedefedAsBOOL(QualType T) {
4365   if (const TypedefType *TT = dyn_cast<TypedefType>(T))
4366     if (IdentifierInfo *II = TT->getDecl()->getIdentifier())
4367       return II->isStr("BOOL");
4368 
4369   return false;
4370 }
4371 
4372 /// getObjCEncodingTypeSize returns size of type for objective-c encoding
4373 /// purpose.
getObjCEncodingTypeSize(QualType type) const4374 CharUnits ASTContext::getObjCEncodingTypeSize(QualType type) const {
4375   if (!type->isIncompleteArrayType() && type->isIncompleteType())
4376     return CharUnits::Zero();
4377 
4378   CharUnits sz = getTypeSizeInChars(type);
4379 
4380   // Make all integer and enum types at least as large as an int
4381   if (sz.isPositive() && type->isIntegralOrEnumerationType())
4382     sz = std::max(sz, getTypeSizeInChars(IntTy));
4383   // Treat arrays as pointers, since that's how they're passed in.
4384   else if (type->isArrayType())
4385     sz = getTypeSizeInChars(VoidPtrTy);
4386   return sz;
4387 }
4388 
4389 static inline
charUnitsToString(const CharUnits & CU)4390 std::string charUnitsToString(const CharUnits &CU) {
4391   return llvm::itostr(CU.getQuantity());
4392 }
4393 
4394 /// getObjCEncodingForBlock - Return the encoded type for this block
4395 /// declaration.
getObjCEncodingForBlock(const BlockExpr * Expr) const4396 std::string ASTContext::getObjCEncodingForBlock(const BlockExpr *Expr) const {
4397   std::string S;
4398 
4399   const BlockDecl *Decl = Expr->getBlockDecl();
4400   QualType BlockTy =
4401       Expr->getType()->getAs<BlockPointerType>()->getPointeeType();
4402   // Encode result type.
4403   getObjCEncodingForType(BlockTy->getAs<FunctionType>()->getResultType(), S);
4404   // Compute size of all parameters.
4405   // Start with computing size of a pointer in number of bytes.
4406   // FIXME: There might(should) be a better way of doing this computation!
4407   SourceLocation Loc;
4408   CharUnits PtrSize = getTypeSizeInChars(VoidPtrTy);
4409   CharUnits ParmOffset = PtrSize;
4410   for (BlockDecl::param_const_iterator PI = Decl->param_begin(),
4411        E = Decl->param_end(); PI != E; ++PI) {
4412     QualType PType = (*PI)->getType();
4413     CharUnits sz = getObjCEncodingTypeSize(PType);
4414     if (sz.isZero())
4415       continue;
4416     assert (sz.isPositive() && "BlockExpr - Incomplete param type");
4417     ParmOffset += sz;
4418   }
4419   // Size of the argument frame
4420   S += charUnitsToString(ParmOffset);
4421   // Block pointer and offset.
4422   S += "@?0";
4423 
4424   // Argument types.
4425   ParmOffset = PtrSize;
4426   for (BlockDecl::param_const_iterator PI = Decl->param_begin(), E =
4427        Decl->param_end(); PI != E; ++PI) {
4428     ParmVarDecl *PVDecl = *PI;
4429     QualType PType = PVDecl->getOriginalType();
4430     if (const ArrayType *AT =
4431           dyn_cast<ArrayType>(PType->getCanonicalTypeInternal())) {
4432       // Use array's original type only if it has known number of
4433       // elements.
4434       if (!isa<ConstantArrayType>(AT))
4435         PType = PVDecl->getType();
4436     } else if (PType->isFunctionType())
4437       PType = PVDecl->getType();
4438     getObjCEncodingForType(PType, S);
4439     S += charUnitsToString(ParmOffset);
4440     ParmOffset += getObjCEncodingTypeSize(PType);
4441   }
4442 
4443   return S;
4444 }
4445 
getObjCEncodingForFunctionDecl(const FunctionDecl * Decl,std::string & S)4446 bool ASTContext::getObjCEncodingForFunctionDecl(const FunctionDecl *Decl,
4447                                                 std::string& S) {
4448   // Encode result type.
4449   getObjCEncodingForType(Decl->getResultType(), S);
4450   CharUnits ParmOffset;
4451   // Compute size of all parameters.
4452   for (FunctionDecl::param_const_iterator PI = Decl->param_begin(),
4453        E = Decl->param_end(); PI != E; ++PI) {
4454     QualType PType = (*PI)->getType();
4455     CharUnits sz = getObjCEncodingTypeSize(PType);
4456     if (sz.isZero())
4457       continue;
4458 
4459     assert (sz.isPositive() &&
4460         "getObjCEncodingForFunctionDecl - Incomplete param type");
4461     ParmOffset += sz;
4462   }
4463   S += charUnitsToString(ParmOffset);
4464   ParmOffset = CharUnits::Zero();
4465 
4466   // Argument types.
4467   for (FunctionDecl::param_const_iterator PI = Decl->param_begin(),
4468        E = Decl->param_end(); PI != E; ++PI) {
4469     ParmVarDecl *PVDecl = *PI;
4470     QualType PType = PVDecl->getOriginalType();
4471     if (const ArrayType *AT =
4472           dyn_cast<ArrayType>(PType->getCanonicalTypeInternal())) {
4473       // Use array's original type only if it has known number of
4474       // elements.
4475       if (!isa<ConstantArrayType>(AT))
4476         PType = PVDecl->getType();
4477     } else if (PType->isFunctionType())
4478       PType = PVDecl->getType();
4479     getObjCEncodingForType(PType, S);
4480     S += charUnitsToString(ParmOffset);
4481     ParmOffset += getObjCEncodingTypeSize(PType);
4482   }
4483 
4484   return false;
4485 }
4486 
4487 /// getObjCEncodingForMethodParameter - Return the encoded type for a single
4488 /// method parameter or return type. If Extended, include class names and
4489 /// block object types.
getObjCEncodingForMethodParameter(Decl::ObjCDeclQualifier QT,QualType T,std::string & S,bool Extended) const4490 void ASTContext::getObjCEncodingForMethodParameter(Decl::ObjCDeclQualifier QT,
4491                                                    QualType T, std::string& S,
4492                                                    bool Extended) const {
4493   // Encode type qualifer, 'in', 'inout', etc. for the parameter.
4494   getObjCEncodingForTypeQualifier(QT, S);
4495   // Encode parameter type.
4496   getObjCEncodingForTypeImpl(T, S, true, true, 0,
4497                              true     /*OutermostType*/,
4498                              false    /*EncodingProperty*/,
4499                              false    /*StructField*/,
4500                              Extended /*EncodeBlockParameters*/,
4501                              Extended /*EncodeClassNames*/);
4502 }
4503 
4504 /// getObjCEncodingForMethodDecl - Return the encoded type for this method
4505 /// declaration.
getObjCEncodingForMethodDecl(const ObjCMethodDecl * Decl,std::string & S,bool Extended) const4506 bool ASTContext::getObjCEncodingForMethodDecl(const ObjCMethodDecl *Decl,
4507                                               std::string& S,
4508                                               bool Extended) const {
4509   // FIXME: This is not very efficient.
4510   // Encode return type.
4511   getObjCEncodingForMethodParameter(Decl->getObjCDeclQualifier(),
4512                                     Decl->getResultType(), S, Extended);
4513   // Compute size of all parameters.
4514   // Start with computing size of a pointer in number of bytes.
4515   // FIXME: There might(should) be a better way of doing this computation!
4516   SourceLocation Loc;
4517   CharUnits PtrSize = getTypeSizeInChars(VoidPtrTy);
4518   // The first two arguments (self and _cmd) are pointers; account for
4519   // their size.
4520   CharUnits ParmOffset = 2 * PtrSize;
4521   for (ObjCMethodDecl::param_const_iterator PI = Decl->param_begin(),
4522        E = Decl->sel_param_end(); PI != E; ++PI) {
4523     QualType PType = (*PI)->getType();
4524     CharUnits sz = getObjCEncodingTypeSize(PType);
4525     if (sz.isZero())
4526       continue;
4527 
4528     assert (sz.isPositive() &&
4529         "getObjCEncodingForMethodDecl - Incomplete param type");
4530     ParmOffset += sz;
4531   }
4532   S += charUnitsToString(ParmOffset);
4533   S += "@0:";
4534   S += charUnitsToString(PtrSize);
4535 
4536   // Argument types.
4537   ParmOffset = 2 * PtrSize;
4538   for (ObjCMethodDecl::param_const_iterator PI = Decl->param_begin(),
4539        E = Decl->sel_param_end(); PI != E; ++PI) {
4540     const ParmVarDecl *PVDecl = *PI;
4541     QualType PType = PVDecl->getOriginalType();
4542     if (const ArrayType *AT =
4543           dyn_cast<ArrayType>(PType->getCanonicalTypeInternal())) {
4544       // Use array's original type only if it has known number of
4545       // elements.
4546       if (!isa<ConstantArrayType>(AT))
4547         PType = PVDecl->getType();
4548     } else if (PType->isFunctionType())
4549       PType = PVDecl->getType();
4550     getObjCEncodingForMethodParameter(PVDecl->getObjCDeclQualifier(),
4551                                       PType, S, Extended);
4552     S += charUnitsToString(ParmOffset);
4553     ParmOffset += getObjCEncodingTypeSize(PType);
4554   }
4555 
4556   return false;
4557 }
4558 
4559 /// getObjCEncodingForPropertyDecl - Return the encoded type for this
4560 /// property declaration. If non-NULL, Container must be either an
4561 /// ObjCCategoryImplDecl or ObjCImplementationDecl; it should only be
4562 /// NULL when getting encodings for protocol properties.
4563 /// Property attributes are stored as a comma-delimited C string. The simple
4564 /// attributes readonly and bycopy are encoded as single characters. The
4565 /// parametrized attributes, getter=name, setter=name, and ivar=name, are
4566 /// encoded as single characters, followed by an identifier. Property types
4567 /// are also encoded as a parametrized attribute. The characters used to encode
4568 /// these attributes are defined by the following enumeration:
4569 /// @code
4570 /// enum PropertyAttributes {
4571 /// kPropertyReadOnly = 'R',   // property is read-only.
4572 /// kPropertyBycopy = 'C',     // property is a copy of the value last assigned
4573 /// kPropertyByref = '&',  // property is a reference to the value last assigned
4574 /// kPropertyDynamic = 'D',    // property is dynamic
4575 /// kPropertyGetter = 'G',     // followed by getter selector name
4576 /// kPropertySetter = 'S',     // followed by setter selector name
4577 /// kPropertyInstanceVariable = 'V'  // followed by instance variable  name
4578 /// kPropertyType = 'T'              // followed by old-style type encoding.
4579 /// kPropertyWeak = 'W'              // 'weak' property
4580 /// kPropertyStrong = 'P'            // property GC'able
4581 /// kPropertyNonAtomic = 'N'         // property non-atomic
4582 /// };
4583 /// @endcode
getObjCEncodingForPropertyDecl(const ObjCPropertyDecl * PD,const Decl * Container,std::string & S) const4584 void ASTContext::getObjCEncodingForPropertyDecl(const ObjCPropertyDecl *PD,
4585                                                 const Decl *Container,
4586                                                 std::string& S) const {
4587   // Collect information from the property implementation decl(s).
4588   bool Dynamic = false;
4589   ObjCPropertyImplDecl *SynthesizePID = 0;
4590 
4591   // FIXME: Duplicated code due to poor abstraction.
4592   if (Container) {
4593     if (const ObjCCategoryImplDecl *CID =
4594         dyn_cast<ObjCCategoryImplDecl>(Container)) {
4595       for (ObjCCategoryImplDecl::propimpl_iterator
4596              i = CID->propimpl_begin(), e = CID->propimpl_end();
4597            i != e; ++i) {
4598         ObjCPropertyImplDecl *PID = *i;
4599         if (PID->getPropertyDecl() == PD) {
4600           if (PID->getPropertyImplementation()==ObjCPropertyImplDecl::Dynamic) {
4601             Dynamic = true;
4602           } else {
4603             SynthesizePID = PID;
4604           }
4605         }
4606       }
4607     } else {
4608       const ObjCImplementationDecl *OID=cast<ObjCImplementationDecl>(Container);
4609       for (ObjCCategoryImplDecl::propimpl_iterator
4610              i = OID->propimpl_begin(), e = OID->propimpl_end();
4611            i != e; ++i) {
4612         ObjCPropertyImplDecl *PID = *i;
4613         if (PID->getPropertyDecl() == PD) {
4614           if (PID->getPropertyImplementation()==ObjCPropertyImplDecl::Dynamic) {
4615             Dynamic = true;
4616           } else {
4617             SynthesizePID = PID;
4618           }
4619         }
4620       }
4621     }
4622   }
4623 
4624   // FIXME: This is not very efficient.
4625   S = "T";
4626 
4627   // Encode result type.
4628   // GCC has some special rules regarding encoding of properties which
4629   // closely resembles encoding of ivars.
4630   getObjCEncodingForTypeImpl(PD->getType(), S, true, true, 0,
4631                              true /* outermost type */,
4632                              true /* encoding for property */);
4633 
4634   if (PD->isReadOnly()) {
4635     S += ",R";
4636   } else {
4637     switch (PD->getSetterKind()) {
4638     case ObjCPropertyDecl::Assign: break;
4639     case ObjCPropertyDecl::Copy:   S += ",C"; break;
4640     case ObjCPropertyDecl::Retain: S += ",&"; break;
4641     case ObjCPropertyDecl::Weak:   S += ",W"; break;
4642     }
4643   }
4644 
4645   // It really isn't clear at all what this means, since properties
4646   // are "dynamic by default".
4647   if (Dynamic)
4648     S += ",D";
4649 
4650   if (PD->getPropertyAttributes() & ObjCPropertyDecl::OBJC_PR_nonatomic)
4651     S += ",N";
4652 
4653   if (PD->getPropertyAttributes() & ObjCPropertyDecl::OBJC_PR_getter) {
4654     S += ",G";
4655     S += PD->getGetterName().getAsString();
4656   }
4657 
4658   if (PD->getPropertyAttributes() & ObjCPropertyDecl::OBJC_PR_setter) {
4659     S += ",S";
4660     S += PD->getSetterName().getAsString();
4661   }
4662 
4663   if (SynthesizePID) {
4664     const ObjCIvarDecl *OID = SynthesizePID->getPropertyIvarDecl();
4665     S += ",V";
4666     S += OID->getNameAsString();
4667   }
4668 
4669   // FIXME: OBJCGC: weak & strong
4670 }
4671 
4672 /// getLegacyIntegralTypeEncoding -
4673 /// Another legacy compatibility encoding: 32-bit longs are encoded as
4674 /// 'l' or 'L' , but not always.  For typedefs, we need to use
4675 /// 'i' or 'I' instead if encoding a struct field, or a pointer!
4676 ///
getLegacyIntegralTypeEncoding(QualType & PointeeTy) const4677 void ASTContext::getLegacyIntegralTypeEncoding (QualType &PointeeTy) const {
4678   if (isa<TypedefType>(PointeeTy.getTypePtr())) {
4679     if (const BuiltinType *BT = PointeeTy->getAs<BuiltinType>()) {
4680       if (BT->getKind() == BuiltinType::ULong && getIntWidth(PointeeTy) == 32)
4681         PointeeTy = UnsignedIntTy;
4682       else
4683         if (BT->getKind() == BuiltinType::Long && getIntWidth(PointeeTy) == 32)
4684           PointeeTy = IntTy;
4685     }
4686   }
4687 }
4688 
getObjCEncodingForType(QualType T,std::string & S,const FieldDecl * Field) const4689 void ASTContext::getObjCEncodingForType(QualType T, std::string& S,
4690                                         const FieldDecl *Field) const {
4691   // We follow the behavior of gcc, expanding structures which are
4692   // directly pointed to, and expanding embedded structures. Note that
4693   // these rules are sufficient to prevent recursive encoding of the
4694   // same type.
4695   getObjCEncodingForTypeImpl(T, S, true, true, Field,
4696                              true /* outermost type */);
4697 }
4698 
ObjCEncodingForPrimitiveKind(const ASTContext * C,QualType T)4699 static char ObjCEncodingForPrimitiveKind(const ASTContext *C, QualType T) {
4700     switch (T->getAs<BuiltinType>()->getKind()) {
4701     default: llvm_unreachable("Unhandled builtin type kind");
4702     case BuiltinType::Void:       return 'v';
4703     case BuiltinType::Bool:       return 'B';
4704     case BuiltinType::Char_U:
4705     case BuiltinType::UChar:      return 'C';
4706     case BuiltinType::UShort:     return 'S';
4707     case BuiltinType::UInt:       return 'I';
4708     case BuiltinType::ULong:
4709         return C->getIntWidth(T) == 32 ? 'L' : 'Q';
4710     case BuiltinType::UInt128:    return 'T';
4711     case BuiltinType::ULongLong:  return 'Q';
4712     case BuiltinType::Char_S:
4713     case BuiltinType::SChar:      return 'c';
4714     case BuiltinType::Short:      return 's';
4715     case BuiltinType::WChar_S:
4716     case BuiltinType::WChar_U:
4717     case BuiltinType::Int:        return 'i';
4718     case BuiltinType::Long:
4719       return C->getIntWidth(T) == 32 ? 'l' : 'q';
4720     case BuiltinType::LongLong:   return 'q';
4721     case BuiltinType::Int128:     return 't';
4722     case BuiltinType::Float:      return 'f';
4723     case BuiltinType::Double:     return 'd';
4724     case BuiltinType::LongDouble: return 'D';
4725     }
4726 }
4727 
ObjCEncodingForEnumType(const ASTContext * C,const EnumType * ET)4728 static char ObjCEncodingForEnumType(const ASTContext *C, const EnumType *ET) {
4729   EnumDecl *Enum = ET->getDecl();
4730 
4731   // The encoding of an non-fixed enum type is always 'i', regardless of size.
4732   if (!Enum->isFixed())
4733     return 'i';
4734 
4735   // The encoding of a fixed enum type matches its fixed underlying type.
4736   return ObjCEncodingForPrimitiveKind(C, Enum->getIntegerType());
4737 }
4738 
EncodeBitField(const ASTContext * Ctx,std::string & S,QualType T,const FieldDecl * FD)4739 static void EncodeBitField(const ASTContext *Ctx, std::string& S,
4740                            QualType T, const FieldDecl *FD) {
4741   assert(FD->isBitField() && "not a bitfield - getObjCEncodingForTypeImpl");
4742   S += 'b';
4743   // The NeXT runtime encodes bit fields as b followed by the number of bits.
4744   // The GNU runtime requires more information; bitfields are encoded as b,
4745   // then the offset (in bits) of the first element, then the type of the
4746   // bitfield, then the size in bits.  For example, in this structure:
4747   //
4748   // struct
4749   // {
4750   //    int integer;
4751   //    int flags:2;
4752   // };
4753   // On a 32-bit system, the encoding for flags would be b2 for the NeXT
4754   // runtime, but b32i2 for the GNU runtime.  The reason for this extra
4755   // information is not especially sensible, but we're stuck with it for
4756   // compatibility with GCC, although providing it breaks anything that
4757   // actually uses runtime introspection and wants to work on both runtimes...
4758   if (Ctx->getLangOpts().ObjCRuntime.isGNUFamily()) {
4759     const RecordDecl *RD = FD->getParent();
4760     const ASTRecordLayout &RL = Ctx->getASTRecordLayout(RD);
4761     S += llvm::utostr(RL.getFieldOffset(FD->getFieldIndex()));
4762     if (const EnumType *ET = T->getAs<EnumType>())
4763       S += ObjCEncodingForEnumType(Ctx, ET);
4764     else
4765       S += ObjCEncodingForPrimitiveKind(Ctx, T);
4766   }
4767   S += llvm::utostr(FD->getBitWidthValue(*Ctx));
4768 }
4769 
4770 // FIXME: Use SmallString for accumulating string.
getObjCEncodingForTypeImpl(QualType T,std::string & S,bool ExpandPointedToStructures,bool ExpandStructures,const FieldDecl * FD,bool OutermostType,bool EncodingProperty,bool StructField,bool EncodeBlockParameters,bool EncodeClassNames) const4771 void ASTContext::getObjCEncodingForTypeImpl(QualType T, std::string& S,
4772                                             bool ExpandPointedToStructures,
4773                                             bool ExpandStructures,
4774                                             const FieldDecl *FD,
4775                                             bool OutermostType,
4776                                             bool EncodingProperty,
4777                                             bool StructField,
4778                                             bool EncodeBlockParameters,
4779                                             bool EncodeClassNames) const {
4780   if (T->getAs<BuiltinType>()) {
4781     if (FD && FD->isBitField())
4782       return EncodeBitField(this, S, T, FD);
4783     S += ObjCEncodingForPrimitiveKind(this, T);
4784     return;
4785   }
4786 
4787   if (const ComplexType *CT = T->getAs<ComplexType>()) {
4788     S += 'j';
4789     getObjCEncodingForTypeImpl(CT->getElementType(), S, false, false, 0, false,
4790                                false);
4791     return;
4792   }
4793 
4794   // encoding for pointer or r3eference types.
4795   QualType PointeeTy;
4796   if (const PointerType *PT = T->getAs<PointerType>()) {
4797     if (PT->isObjCSelType()) {
4798       S += ':';
4799       return;
4800     }
4801     PointeeTy = PT->getPointeeType();
4802   }
4803   else if (const ReferenceType *RT = T->getAs<ReferenceType>())
4804     PointeeTy = RT->getPointeeType();
4805   if (!PointeeTy.isNull()) {
4806     bool isReadOnly = false;
4807     // For historical/compatibility reasons, the read-only qualifier of the
4808     // pointee gets emitted _before_ the '^'.  The read-only qualifier of
4809     // the pointer itself gets ignored, _unless_ we are looking at a typedef!
4810     // Also, do not emit the 'r' for anything but the outermost type!
4811     if (isa<TypedefType>(T.getTypePtr())) {
4812       if (OutermostType && T.isConstQualified()) {
4813         isReadOnly = true;
4814         S += 'r';
4815       }
4816     } else if (OutermostType) {
4817       QualType P = PointeeTy;
4818       while (P->getAs<PointerType>())
4819         P = P->getAs<PointerType>()->getPointeeType();
4820       if (P.isConstQualified()) {
4821         isReadOnly = true;
4822         S += 'r';
4823       }
4824     }
4825     if (isReadOnly) {
4826       // Another legacy compatibility encoding. Some ObjC qualifier and type
4827       // combinations need to be rearranged.
4828       // Rewrite "in const" from "nr" to "rn"
4829       if (StringRef(S).endswith("nr"))
4830         S.replace(S.end()-2, S.end(), "rn");
4831     }
4832 
4833     if (PointeeTy->isCharType()) {
4834       // char pointer types should be encoded as '*' unless it is a
4835       // type that has been typedef'd to 'BOOL'.
4836       if (!isTypeTypedefedAsBOOL(PointeeTy)) {
4837         S += '*';
4838         return;
4839       }
4840     } else if (const RecordType *RTy = PointeeTy->getAs<RecordType>()) {
4841       // GCC binary compat: Need to convert "struct objc_class *" to "#".
4842       if (RTy->getDecl()->getIdentifier() == &Idents.get("objc_class")) {
4843         S += '#';
4844         return;
4845       }
4846       // GCC binary compat: Need to convert "struct objc_object *" to "@".
4847       if (RTy->getDecl()->getIdentifier() == &Idents.get("objc_object")) {
4848         S += '@';
4849         return;
4850       }
4851       // fall through...
4852     }
4853     S += '^';
4854     getLegacyIntegralTypeEncoding(PointeeTy);
4855 
4856     getObjCEncodingForTypeImpl(PointeeTy, S, false, ExpandPointedToStructures,
4857                                NULL);
4858     return;
4859   }
4860 
4861   if (const ArrayType *AT =
4862       // Ignore type qualifiers etc.
4863         dyn_cast<ArrayType>(T->getCanonicalTypeInternal())) {
4864     if (isa<IncompleteArrayType>(AT) && !StructField) {
4865       // Incomplete arrays are encoded as a pointer to the array element.
4866       S += '^';
4867 
4868       getObjCEncodingForTypeImpl(AT->getElementType(), S,
4869                                  false, ExpandStructures, FD);
4870     } else {
4871       S += '[';
4872 
4873       if (const ConstantArrayType *CAT = dyn_cast<ConstantArrayType>(AT)) {
4874         if (getTypeSize(CAT->getElementType()) == 0)
4875           S += '0';
4876         else
4877           S += llvm::utostr(CAT->getSize().getZExtValue());
4878       } else {
4879         //Variable length arrays are encoded as a regular array with 0 elements.
4880         assert((isa<VariableArrayType>(AT) || isa<IncompleteArrayType>(AT)) &&
4881                "Unknown array type!");
4882         S += '0';
4883       }
4884 
4885       getObjCEncodingForTypeImpl(AT->getElementType(), S,
4886                                  false, ExpandStructures, FD);
4887       S += ']';
4888     }
4889     return;
4890   }
4891 
4892   if (T->getAs<FunctionType>()) {
4893     S += '?';
4894     return;
4895   }
4896 
4897   if (const RecordType *RTy = T->getAs<RecordType>()) {
4898     RecordDecl *RDecl = RTy->getDecl();
4899     S += RDecl->isUnion() ? '(' : '{';
4900     // Anonymous structures print as '?'
4901     if (const IdentifierInfo *II = RDecl->getIdentifier()) {
4902       S += II->getName();
4903       if (ClassTemplateSpecializationDecl *Spec
4904           = dyn_cast<ClassTemplateSpecializationDecl>(RDecl)) {
4905         const TemplateArgumentList &TemplateArgs = Spec->getTemplateArgs();
4906         std::string TemplateArgsStr
4907           = TemplateSpecializationType::PrintTemplateArgumentList(
4908                                             TemplateArgs.data(),
4909                                             TemplateArgs.size(),
4910                                             (*this).getPrintingPolicy());
4911 
4912         S += TemplateArgsStr;
4913       }
4914     } else {
4915       S += '?';
4916     }
4917     if (ExpandStructures) {
4918       S += '=';
4919       if (!RDecl->isUnion()) {
4920         getObjCEncodingForStructureImpl(RDecl, S, FD);
4921       } else {
4922         for (RecordDecl::field_iterator Field = RDecl->field_begin(),
4923                                      FieldEnd = RDecl->field_end();
4924              Field != FieldEnd; ++Field) {
4925           if (FD) {
4926             S += '"';
4927             S += Field->getNameAsString();
4928             S += '"';
4929           }
4930 
4931           // Special case bit-fields.
4932           if (Field->isBitField()) {
4933             getObjCEncodingForTypeImpl(Field->getType(), S, false, true,
4934                                        *Field);
4935           } else {
4936             QualType qt = Field->getType();
4937             getLegacyIntegralTypeEncoding(qt);
4938             getObjCEncodingForTypeImpl(qt, S, false, true,
4939                                        FD, /*OutermostType*/false,
4940                                        /*EncodingProperty*/false,
4941                                        /*StructField*/true);
4942           }
4943         }
4944       }
4945     }
4946     S += RDecl->isUnion() ? ')' : '}';
4947     return;
4948   }
4949 
4950   if (const EnumType *ET = T->getAs<EnumType>()) {
4951     if (FD && FD->isBitField())
4952       EncodeBitField(this, S, T, FD);
4953     else
4954       S += ObjCEncodingForEnumType(this, ET);
4955     return;
4956   }
4957 
4958   if (const BlockPointerType *BT = T->getAs<BlockPointerType>()) {
4959     S += "@?"; // Unlike a pointer-to-function, which is "^?".
4960     if (EncodeBlockParameters) {
4961       const FunctionType *FT = BT->getPointeeType()->getAs<FunctionType>();
4962 
4963       S += '<';
4964       // Block return type
4965       getObjCEncodingForTypeImpl(FT->getResultType(), S,
4966                                  ExpandPointedToStructures, ExpandStructures,
4967                                  FD,
4968                                  false /* OutermostType */,
4969                                  EncodingProperty,
4970                                  false /* StructField */,
4971                                  EncodeBlockParameters,
4972                                  EncodeClassNames);
4973       // Block self
4974       S += "@?";
4975       // Block parameters
4976       if (const FunctionProtoType *FPT = dyn_cast<FunctionProtoType>(FT)) {
4977         for (FunctionProtoType::arg_type_iterator I = FPT->arg_type_begin(),
4978                E = FPT->arg_type_end(); I && (I != E); ++I) {
4979           getObjCEncodingForTypeImpl(*I, S,
4980                                      ExpandPointedToStructures,
4981                                      ExpandStructures,
4982                                      FD,
4983                                      false /* OutermostType */,
4984                                      EncodingProperty,
4985                                      false /* StructField */,
4986                                      EncodeBlockParameters,
4987                                      EncodeClassNames);
4988         }
4989       }
4990       S += '>';
4991     }
4992     return;
4993   }
4994 
4995   // Ignore protocol qualifiers when mangling at this level.
4996   if (const ObjCObjectType *OT = T->getAs<ObjCObjectType>())
4997     T = OT->getBaseType();
4998 
4999   if (const ObjCInterfaceType *OIT = T->getAs<ObjCInterfaceType>()) {
5000     // @encode(class_name)
5001     ObjCInterfaceDecl *OI = OIT->getDecl();
5002     S += '{';
5003     const IdentifierInfo *II = OI->getIdentifier();
5004     S += II->getName();
5005     S += '=';
5006     SmallVector<const ObjCIvarDecl*, 32> Ivars;
5007     DeepCollectObjCIvars(OI, true, Ivars);
5008     for (unsigned i = 0, e = Ivars.size(); i != e; ++i) {
5009       const FieldDecl *Field = cast<FieldDecl>(Ivars[i]);
5010       if (Field->isBitField())
5011         getObjCEncodingForTypeImpl(Field->getType(), S, false, true, Field);
5012       else
5013         getObjCEncodingForTypeImpl(Field->getType(), S, false, true, FD);
5014     }
5015     S += '}';
5016     return;
5017   }
5018 
5019   if (const ObjCObjectPointerType *OPT = T->getAs<ObjCObjectPointerType>()) {
5020     if (OPT->isObjCIdType()) {
5021       S += '@';
5022       return;
5023     }
5024 
5025     if (OPT->isObjCClassType() || OPT->isObjCQualifiedClassType()) {
5026       // FIXME: Consider if we need to output qualifiers for 'Class<p>'.
5027       // Since this is a binary compatibility issue, need to consult with runtime
5028       // folks. Fortunately, this is a *very* obsure construct.
5029       S += '#';
5030       return;
5031     }
5032 
5033     if (OPT->isObjCQualifiedIdType()) {
5034       getObjCEncodingForTypeImpl(getObjCIdType(), S,
5035                                  ExpandPointedToStructures,
5036                                  ExpandStructures, FD);
5037       if (FD || EncodingProperty || EncodeClassNames) {
5038         // Note that we do extended encoding of protocol qualifer list
5039         // Only when doing ivar or property encoding.
5040         S += '"';
5041         for (ObjCObjectPointerType::qual_iterator I = OPT->qual_begin(),
5042              E = OPT->qual_end(); I != E; ++I) {
5043           S += '<';
5044           S += (*I)->getNameAsString();
5045           S += '>';
5046         }
5047         S += '"';
5048       }
5049       return;
5050     }
5051 
5052     QualType PointeeTy = OPT->getPointeeType();
5053     if (!EncodingProperty &&
5054         isa<TypedefType>(PointeeTy.getTypePtr())) {
5055       // Another historical/compatibility reason.
5056       // We encode the underlying type which comes out as
5057       // {...};
5058       S += '^';
5059       getObjCEncodingForTypeImpl(PointeeTy, S,
5060                                  false, ExpandPointedToStructures,
5061                                  NULL);
5062       return;
5063     }
5064 
5065     S += '@';
5066     if (OPT->getInterfaceDecl() &&
5067         (FD || EncodingProperty || EncodeClassNames)) {
5068       S += '"';
5069       S += OPT->getInterfaceDecl()->getIdentifier()->getName();
5070       for (ObjCObjectPointerType::qual_iterator I = OPT->qual_begin(),
5071            E = OPT->qual_end(); I != E; ++I) {
5072         S += '<';
5073         S += (*I)->getNameAsString();
5074         S += '>';
5075       }
5076       S += '"';
5077     }
5078     return;
5079   }
5080 
5081   // gcc just blithely ignores member pointers.
5082   // TODO: maybe there should be a mangling for these
5083   if (T->getAs<MemberPointerType>())
5084     return;
5085 
5086   if (T->isVectorType()) {
5087     // This matches gcc's encoding, even though technically it is
5088     // insufficient.
5089     // FIXME. We should do a better job than gcc.
5090     return;
5091   }
5092 
5093   llvm_unreachable("@encode for type not implemented!");
5094 }
5095 
getObjCEncodingForStructureImpl(RecordDecl * RDecl,std::string & S,const FieldDecl * FD,bool includeVBases) const5096 void ASTContext::getObjCEncodingForStructureImpl(RecordDecl *RDecl,
5097                                                  std::string &S,
5098                                                  const FieldDecl *FD,
5099                                                  bool includeVBases) const {
5100   assert(RDecl && "Expected non-null RecordDecl");
5101   assert(!RDecl->isUnion() && "Should not be called for unions");
5102   if (!RDecl->getDefinition())
5103     return;
5104 
5105   CXXRecordDecl *CXXRec = dyn_cast<CXXRecordDecl>(RDecl);
5106   std::multimap<uint64_t, NamedDecl *> FieldOrBaseOffsets;
5107   const ASTRecordLayout &layout = getASTRecordLayout(RDecl);
5108 
5109   if (CXXRec) {
5110     for (CXXRecordDecl::base_class_iterator
5111            BI = CXXRec->bases_begin(),
5112            BE = CXXRec->bases_end(); BI != BE; ++BI) {
5113       if (!BI->isVirtual()) {
5114         CXXRecordDecl *base = BI->getType()->getAsCXXRecordDecl();
5115         if (base->isEmpty())
5116           continue;
5117         uint64_t offs = toBits(layout.getBaseClassOffset(base));
5118         FieldOrBaseOffsets.insert(FieldOrBaseOffsets.upper_bound(offs),
5119                                   std::make_pair(offs, base));
5120       }
5121     }
5122   }
5123 
5124   unsigned i = 0;
5125   for (RecordDecl::field_iterator Field = RDecl->field_begin(),
5126                                FieldEnd = RDecl->field_end();
5127        Field != FieldEnd; ++Field, ++i) {
5128     uint64_t offs = layout.getFieldOffset(i);
5129     FieldOrBaseOffsets.insert(FieldOrBaseOffsets.upper_bound(offs),
5130                               std::make_pair(offs, *Field));
5131   }
5132 
5133   if (CXXRec && includeVBases) {
5134     for (CXXRecordDecl::base_class_iterator
5135            BI = CXXRec->vbases_begin(),
5136            BE = CXXRec->vbases_end(); BI != BE; ++BI) {
5137       CXXRecordDecl *base = BI->getType()->getAsCXXRecordDecl();
5138       if (base->isEmpty())
5139         continue;
5140       uint64_t offs = toBits(layout.getVBaseClassOffset(base));
5141       if (FieldOrBaseOffsets.find(offs) == FieldOrBaseOffsets.end())
5142         FieldOrBaseOffsets.insert(FieldOrBaseOffsets.end(),
5143                                   std::make_pair(offs, base));
5144     }
5145   }
5146 
5147   CharUnits size;
5148   if (CXXRec) {
5149     size = includeVBases ? layout.getSize() : layout.getNonVirtualSize();
5150   } else {
5151     size = layout.getSize();
5152   }
5153 
5154   uint64_t CurOffs = 0;
5155   std::multimap<uint64_t, NamedDecl *>::iterator
5156     CurLayObj = FieldOrBaseOffsets.begin();
5157 
5158   if (CXXRec && CXXRec->isDynamicClass() &&
5159       (CurLayObj == FieldOrBaseOffsets.end() || CurLayObj->first != 0)) {
5160     if (FD) {
5161       S += "\"_vptr$";
5162       std::string recname = CXXRec->getNameAsString();
5163       if (recname.empty()) recname = "?";
5164       S += recname;
5165       S += '"';
5166     }
5167     S += "^^?";
5168     CurOffs += getTypeSize(VoidPtrTy);
5169   }
5170 
5171   if (!RDecl->hasFlexibleArrayMember()) {
5172     // Mark the end of the structure.
5173     uint64_t offs = toBits(size);
5174     FieldOrBaseOffsets.insert(FieldOrBaseOffsets.upper_bound(offs),
5175                               std::make_pair(offs, (NamedDecl*)0));
5176   }
5177 
5178   for (; CurLayObj != FieldOrBaseOffsets.end(); ++CurLayObj) {
5179     assert(CurOffs <= CurLayObj->first);
5180 
5181     if (CurOffs < CurLayObj->first) {
5182       uint64_t padding = CurLayObj->first - CurOffs;
5183       // FIXME: There doesn't seem to be a way to indicate in the encoding that
5184       // packing/alignment of members is different that normal, in which case
5185       // the encoding will be out-of-sync with the real layout.
5186       // If the runtime switches to just consider the size of types without
5187       // taking into account alignment, we could make padding explicit in the
5188       // encoding (e.g. using arrays of chars). The encoding strings would be
5189       // longer then though.
5190       CurOffs += padding;
5191     }
5192 
5193     NamedDecl *dcl = CurLayObj->second;
5194     if (dcl == 0)
5195       break; // reached end of structure.
5196 
5197     if (CXXRecordDecl *base = dyn_cast<CXXRecordDecl>(dcl)) {
5198       // We expand the bases without their virtual bases since those are going
5199       // in the initial structure. Note that this differs from gcc which
5200       // expands virtual bases each time one is encountered in the hierarchy,
5201       // making the encoding type bigger than it really is.
5202       getObjCEncodingForStructureImpl(base, S, FD, /*includeVBases*/false);
5203       assert(!base->isEmpty());
5204       CurOffs += toBits(getASTRecordLayout(base).getNonVirtualSize());
5205     } else {
5206       FieldDecl *field = cast<FieldDecl>(dcl);
5207       if (FD) {
5208         S += '"';
5209         S += field->getNameAsString();
5210         S += '"';
5211       }
5212 
5213       if (field->isBitField()) {
5214         EncodeBitField(this, S, field->getType(), field);
5215         CurOffs += field->getBitWidthValue(*this);
5216       } else {
5217         QualType qt = field->getType();
5218         getLegacyIntegralTypeEncoding(qt);
5219         getObjCEncodingForTypeImpl(qt, S, false, true, FD,
5220                                    /*OutermostType*/false,
5221                                    /*EncodingProperty*/false,
5222                                    /*StructField*/true);
5223         CurOffs += getTypeSize(field->getType());
5224       }
5225     }
5226   }
5227 }
5228 
getObjCEncodingForTypeQualifier(Decl::ObjCDeclQualifier QT,std::string & S) const5229 void ASTContext::getObjCEncodingForTypeQualifier(Decl::ObjCDeclQualifier QT,
5230                                                  std::string& S) const {
5231   if (QT & Decl::OBJC_TQ_In)
5232     S += 'n';
5233   if (QT & Decl::OBJC_TQ_Inout)
5234     S += 'N';
5235   if (QT & Decl::OBJC_TQ_Out)
5236     S += 'o';
5237   if (QT & Decl::OBJC_TQ_Bycopy)
5238     S += 'O';
5239   if (QT & Decl::OBJC_TQ_Byref)
5240     S += 'R';
5241   if (QT & Decl::OBJC_TQ_Oneway)
5242     S += 'V';
5243 }
5244 
getObjCIdDecl() const5245 TypedefDecl *ASTContext::getObjCIdDecl() const {
5246   if (!ObjCIdDecl) {
5247     QualType T = getObjCObjectType(ObjCBuiltinIdTy, 0, 0);
5248     T = getObjCObjectPointerType(T);
5249     TypeSourceInfo *IdInfo = getTrivialTypeSourceInfo(T);
5250     ObjCIdDecl = TypedefDecl::Create(const_cast<ASTContext &>(*this),
5251                                      getTranslationUnitDecl(),
5252                                      SourceLocation(), SourceLocation(),
5253                                      &Idents.get("id"), IdInfo);
5254   }
5255 
5256   return ObjCIdDecl;
5257 }
5258 
getObjCSelDecl() const5259 TypedefDecl *ASTContext::getObjCSelDecl() const {
5260   if (!ObjCSelDecl) {
5261     QualType SelT = getPointerType(ObjCBuiltinSelTy);
5262     TypeSourceInfo *SelInfo = getTrivialTypeSourceInfo(SelT);
5263     ObjCSelDecl = TypedefDecl::Create(const_cast<ASTContext &>(*this),
5264                                       getTranslationUnitDecl(),
5265                                       SourceLocation(), SourceLocation(),
5266                                       &Idents.get("SEL"), SelInfo);
5267   }
5268   return ObjCSelDecl;
5269 }
5270 
getObjCClassDecl() const5271 TypedefDecl *ASTContext::getObjCClassDecl() const {
5272   if (!ObjCClassDecl) {
5273     QualType T = getObjCObjectType(ObjCBuiltinClassTy, 0, 0);
5274     T = getObjCObjectPointerType(T);
5275     TypeSourceInfo *ClassInfo = getTrivialTypeSourceInfo(T);
5276     ObjCClassDecl = TypedefDecl::Create(const_cast<ASTContext &>(*this),
5277                                         getTranslationUnitDecl(),
5278                                         SourceLocation(), SourceLocation(),
5279                                         &Idents.get("Class"), ClassInfo);
5280   }
5281 
5282   return ObjCClassDecl;
5283 }
5284 
getObjCProtocolDecl() const5285 ObjCInterfaceDecl *ASTContext::getObjCProtocolDecl() const {
5286   if (!ObjCProtocolClassDecl) {
5287     ObjCProtocolClassDecl
5288       = ObjCInterfaceDecl::Create(*this, getTranslationUnitDecl(),
5289                                   SourceLocation(),
5290                                   &Idents.get("Protocol"),
5291                                   /*PrevDecl=*/0,
5292                                   SourceLocation(), true);
5293   }
5294 
5295   return ObjCProtocolClassDecl;
5296 }
5297 
5298 //===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
5299 // __builtin_va_list Construction Functions
5300 //===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
5301 
CreateCharPtrBuiltinVaListDecl(const ASTContext * Context)5302 static TypedefDecl *CreateCharPtrBuiltinVaListDecl(const ASTContext *Context) {
5303   // typedef char* __builtin_va_list;
5304   QualType CharPtrType = Context->getPointerType(Context->CharTy);
5305   TypeSourceInfo *TInfo
5306     = Context->getTrivialTypeSourceInfo(CharPtrType);
5307 
5308   TypedefDecl *VaListTypeDecl
5309     = TypedefDecl::Create(const_cast<ASTContext &>(*Context),
5310                           Context->getTranslationUnitDecl(),
5311                           SourceLocation(), SourceLocation(),
5312                           &Context->Idents.get("__builtin_va_list"),
5313                           TInfo);
5314   return VaListTypeDecl;
5315 }
5316 
CreateVoidPtrBuiltinVaListDecl(const ASTContext * Context)5317 static TypedefDecl *CreateVoidPtrBuiltinVaListDecl(const ASTContext *Context) {
5318   // typedef void* __builtin_va_list;
5319   QualType VoidPtrType = Context->getPointerType(Context->VoidTy);
5320   TypeSourceInfo *TInfo
5321     = Context->getTrivialTypeSourceInfo(VoidPtrType);
5322 
5323   TypedefDecl *VaListTypeDecl
5324     = TypedefDecl::Create(const_cast<ASTContext &>(*Context),
5325                           Context->getTranslationUnitDecl(),
5326                           SourceLocation(), SourceLocation(),
5327                           &Context->Idents.get("__builtin_va_list"),
5328                           TInfo);
5329   return VaListTypeDecl;
5330 }
5331 
CreatePowerABIBuiltinVaListDecl(const ASTContext * Context)5332 static TypedefDecl *CreatePowerABIBuiltinVaListDecl(const ASTContext *Context) {
5333   // typedef struct __va_list_tag {
5334   RecordDecl *VaListTagDecl;
5335 
5336   VaListTagDecl = CreateRecordDecl(*Context, TTK_Struct,
5337                                    Context->getTranslationUnitDecl(),
5338                                    &Context->Idents.get("__va_list_tag"));
5339   VaListTagDecl->startDefinition();
5340 
5341   const size_t NumFields = 5;
5342   QualType FieldTypes[NumFields];
5343   const char *FieldNames[NumFields];
5344 
5345   //   unsigned char gpr;
5346   FieldTypes[0] = Context->UnsignedCharTy;
5347   FieldNames[0] = "gpr";
5348 
5349   //   unsigned char fpr;
5350   FieldTypes[1] = Context->UnsignedCharTy;
5351   FieldNames[1] = "fpr";
5352 
5353   //   unsigned short reserved;
5354   FieldTypes[2] = Context->UnsignedShortTy;
5355   FieldNames[2] = "reserved";
5356 
5357   //   void* overflow_arg_area;
5358   FieldTypes[3] = Context->getPointerType(Context->VoidTy);
5359   FieldNames[3] = "overflow_arg_area";
5360 
5361   //   void* reg_save_area;
5362   FieldTypes[4] = Context->getPointerType(Context->VoidTy);
5363   FieldNames[4] = "reg_save_area";
5364 
5365   // Create fields
5366   for (unsigned i = 0; i < NumFields; ++i) {
5367     FieldDecl *Field = FieldDecl::Create(*Context, VaListTagDecl,
5368                                          SourceLocation(),
5369                                          SourceLocation(),
5370                                          &Context->Idents.get(FieldNames[i]),
5371                                          FieldTypes[i], /*TInfo=*/0,
5372                                          /*BitWidth=*/0,
5373                                          /*Mutable=*/false,
5374                                          ICIS_NoInit);
5375     Field->setAccess(AS_public);
5376     VaListTagDecl->addDecl(Field);
5377   }
5378   VaListTagDecl->completeDefinition();
5379   QualType VaListTagType = Context->getRecordType(VaListTagDecl);
5380   Context->VaListTagTy = VaListTagType;
5381 
5382   // } __va_list_tag;
5383   TypedefDecl *VaListTagTypedefDecl
5384     = TypedefDecl::Create(const_cast<ASTContext &>(*Context),
5385                           Context->getTranslationUnitDecl(),
5386                           SourceLocation(), SourceLocation(),
5387                           &Context->Idents.get("__va_list_tag"),
5388                           Context->getTrivialTypeSourceInfo(VaListTagType));
5389   QualType VaListTagTypedefType =
5390     Context->getTypedefType(VaListTagTypedefDecl);
5391 
5392   // typedef __va_list_tag __builtin_va_list[1];
5393   llvm::APInt Size(Context->getTypeSize(Context->getSizeType()), 1);
5394   QualType VaListTagArrayType
5395     = Context->getConstantArrayType(VaListTagTypedefType,
5396                                     Size, ArrayType::Normal, 0);
5397   TypeSourceInfo *TInfo
5398     = Context->getTrivialTypeSourceInfo(VaListTagArrayType);
5399   TypedefDecl *VaListTypedefDecl
5400     = TypedefDecl::Create(const_cast<ASTContext &>(*Context),
5401                           Context->getTranslationUnitDecl(),
5402                           SourceLocation(), SourceLocation(),
5403                           &Context->Idents.get("__builtin_va_list"),
5404                           TInfo);
5405 
5406   return VaListTypedefDecl;
5407 }
5408 
5409 static TypedefDecl *
CreateX86_64ABIBuiltinVaListDecl(const ASTContext * Context)5410 CreateX86_64ABIBuiltinVaListDecl(const ASTContext *Context) {
5411   // typedef struct __va_list_tag {
5412   RecordDecl *VaListTagDecl;
5413   VaListTagDecl = CreateRecordDecl(*Context, TTK_Struct,
5414                                    Context->getTranslationUnitDecl(),
5415                                    &Context->Idents.get("__va_list_tag"));
5416   VaListTagDecl->startDefinition();
5417 
5418   const size_t NumFields = 4;
5419   QualType FieldTypes[NumFields];
5420   const char *FieldNames[NumFields];
5421 
5422   //   unsigned gp_offset;
5423   FieldTypes[0] = Context->UnsignedIntTy;
5424   FieldNames[0] = "gp_offset";
5425 
5426   //   unsigned fp_offset;
5427   FieldTypes[1] = Context->UnsignedIntTy;
5428   FieldNames[1] = "fp_offset";
5429 
5430   //   void* overflow_arg_area;
5431   FieldTypes[2] = Context->getPointerType(Context->VoidTy);
5432   FieldNames[2] = "overflow_arg_area";
5433 
5434   //   void* reg_save_area;
5435   FieldTypes[3] = Context->getPointerType(Context->VoidTy);
5436   FieldNames[3] = "reg_save_area";
5437 
5438   // Create fields
5439   for (unsigned i = 0; i < NumFields; ++i) {
5440     FieldDecl *Field = FieldDecl::Create(const_cast<ASTContext &>(*Context),
5441                                          VaListTagDecl,
5442                                          SourceLocation(),
5443                                          SourceLocation(),
5444                                          &Context->Idents.get(FieldNames[i]),
5445                                          FieldTypes[i], /*TInfo=*/0,
5446                                          /*BitWidth=*/0,
5447                                          /*Mutable=*/false,
5448                                          ICIS_NoInit);
5449     Field->setAccess(AS_public);
5450     VaListTagDecl->addDecl(Field);
5451   }
5452   VaListTagDecl->completeDefinition();
5453   QualType VaListTagType = Context->getRecordType(VaListTagDecl);
5454   Context->VaListTagTy = VaListTagType;
5455 
5456   // } __va_list_tag;
5457   TypedefDecl *VaListTagTypedefDecl
5458     = TypedefDecl::Create(const_cast<ASTContext &>(*Context),
5459                           Context->getTranslationUnitDecl(),
5460                           SourceLocation(), SourceLocation(),
5461                           &Context->Idents.get("__va_list_tag"),
5462                           Context->getTrivialTypeSourceInfo(VaListTagType));
5463   QualType VaListTagTypedefType =
5464     Context->getTypedefType(VaListTagTypedefDecl);
5465 
5466   // typedef __va_list_tag __builtin_va_list[1];
5467   llvm::APInt Size(Context->getTypeSize(Context->getSizeType()), 1);
5468   QualType VaListTagArrayType
5469     = Context->getConstantArrayType(VaListTagTypedefType,
5470                                       Size, ArrayType::Normal,0);
5471   TypeSourceInfo *TInfo
5472     = Context->getTrivialTypeSourceInfo(VaListTagArrayType);
5473   TypedefDecl *VaListTypedefDecl
5474     = TypedefDecl::Create(const_cast<ASTContext &>(*Context),
5475                           Context->getTranslationUnitDecl(),
5476                           SourceLocation(), SourceLocation(),
5477                           &Context->Idents.get("__builtin_va_list"),
5478                           TInfo);
5479 
5480   return VaListTypedefDecl;
5481 }
5482 
CreatePNaClABIBuiltinVaListDecl(const ASTContext * Context)5483 static TypedefDecl *CreatePNaClABIBuiltinVaListDecl(const ASTContext *Context) {
5484   // typedef int __builtin_va_list[4];
5485   llvm::APInt Size(Context->getTypeSize(Context->getSizeType()), 4);
5486   QualType IntArrayType
5487     = Context->getConstantArrayType(Context->IntTy,
5488 				    Size, ArrayType::Normal, 0);
5489   TypedefDecl *VaListTypedefDecl
5490     = TypedefDecl::Create(const_cast<ASTContext &>(*Context),
5491                           Context->getTranslationUnitDecl(),
5492                           SourceLocation(), SourceLocation(),
5493                           &Context->Idents.get("__builtin_va_list"),
5494                           Context->getTrivialTypeSourceInfo(IntArrayType));
5495 
5496   return VaListTypedefDecl;
5497 }
5498 
CreateVaListDecl(const ASTContext * Context,TargetInfo::BuiltinVaListKind Kind)5499 static TypedefDecl *CreateVaListDecl(const ASTContext *Context,
5500                                      TargetInfo::BuiltinVaListKind Kind) {
5501   switch (Kind) {
5502   case TargetInfo::CharPtrBuiltinVaList:
5503     return CreateCharPtrBuiltinVaListDecl(Context);
5504   case TargetInfo::VoidPtrBuiltinVaList:
5505     return CreateVoidPtrBuiltinVaListDecl(Context);
5506   case TargetInfo::PowerABIBuiltinVaList:
5507     return CreatePowerABIBuiltinVaListDecl(Context);
5508   case TargetInfo::X86_64ABIBuiltinVaList:
5509     return CreateX86_64ABIBuiltinVaListDecl(Context);
5510   case TargetInfo::PNaClABIBuiltinVaList:
5511     return CreatePNaClABIBuiltinVaListDecl(Context);
5512   }
5513 
5514   llvm_unreachable("Unhandled __builtin_va_list type kind");
5515 }
5516 
getBuiltinVaListDecl() const5517 TypedefDecl *ASTContext::getBuiltinVaListDecl() const {
5518   if (!BuiltinVaListDecl)
5519     BuiltinVaListDecl = CreateVaListDecl(this, Target->getBuiltinVaListKind());
5520 
5521   return BuiltinVaListDecl;
5522 }
5523 
getVaListTagType() const5524 QualType ASTContext::getVaListTagType() const {
5525   // Force the creation of VaListTagTy by building the __builtin_va_list
5526   // declaration.
5527   if (VaListTagTy.isNull())
5528     (void) getBuiltinVaListDecl();
5529 
5530   return VaListTagTy;
5531 }
5532 
setObjCConstantStringInterface(ObjCInterfaceDecl * Decl)5533 void ASTContext::setObjCConstantStringInterface(ObjCInterfaceDecl *Decl) {
5534   assert(ObjCConstantStringType.isNull() &&
5535          "'NSConstantString' type already set!");
5536 
5537   ObjCConstantStringType = getObjCInterfaceType(Decl);
5538 }
5539 
5540 /// \brief Retrieve the template name that corresponds to a non-empty
5541 /// lookup.
5542 TemplateName
getOverloadedTemplateName(UnresolvedSetIterator Begin,UnresolvedSetIterator End) const5543 ASTContext::getOverloadedTemplateName(UnresolvedSetIterator Begin,
5544                                       UnresolvedSetIterator End) const {
5545   unsigned size = End - Begin;
5546   assert(size > 1 && "set is not overloaded!");
5547 
5548   void *memory = Allocate(sizeof(OverloadedTemplateStorage) +
5549                           size * sizeof(FunctionTemplateDecl*));
5550   OverloadedTemplateStorage *OT = new(memory) OverloadedTemplateStorage(size);
5551 
5552   NamedDecl **Storage = OT->getStorage();
5553   for (UnresolvedSetIterator I = Begin; I != End; ++I) {
5554     NamedDecl *D = *I;
5555     assert(isa<FunctionTemplateDecl>(D) ||
5556            (isa<UsingShadowDecl>(D) &&
5557             isa<FunctionTemplateDecl>(D->getUnderlyingDecl())));
5558     *Storage++ = D;
5559   }
5560 
5561   return TemplateName(OT);
5562 }
5563 
5564 /// \brief Retrieve the template name that represents a qualified
5565 /// template name such as \c std::vector.
5566 TemplateName
getQualifiedTemplateName(NestedNameSpecifier * NNS,bool TemplateKeyword,TemplateDecl * Template) const5567 ASTContext::getQualifiedTemplateName(NestedNameSpecifier *NNS,
5568                                      bool TemplateKeyword,
5569                                      TemplateDecl *Template) const {
5570   assert(NNS && "Missing nested-name-specifier in qualified template name");
5571 
5572   // FIXME: Canonicalization?
5573   llvm::FoldingSetNodeID ID;
5574   QualifiedTemplateName::Profile(ID, NNS, TemplateKeyword, Template);
5575 
5576   void *InsertPos = 0;
5577   QualifiedTemplateName *QTN =
5578     QualifiedTemplateNames.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos);
5579   if (!QTN) {
5580     QTN = new (*this, llvm::alignOf<QualifiedTemplateName>())
5581         QualifiedTemplateName(NNS, TemplateKeyword, Template);
5582     QualifiedTemplateNames.InsertNode(QTN, InsertPos);
5583   }
5584 
5585   return TemplateName(QTN);
5586 }
5587 
5588 /// \brief Retrieve the template name that represents a dependent
5589 /// template name such as \c MetaFun::template apply.
5590 TemplateName
getDependentTemplateName(NestedNameSpecifier * NNS,const IdentifierInfo * Name) const5591 ASTContext::getDependentTemplateName(NestedNameSpecifier *NNS,
5592                                      const IdentifierInfo *Name) const {
5593   assert((!NNS || NNS->isDependent()) &&
5594          "Nested name specifier must be dependent");
5595 
5596   llvm::FoldingSetNodeID ID;
5597   DependentTemplateName::Profile(ID, NNS, Name);
5598 
5599   void *InsertPos = 0;
5600   DependentTemplateName *QTN =
5601     DependentTemplateNames.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos);
5602 
5603   if (QTN)
5604     return TemplateName(QTN);
5605 
5606   NestedNameSpecifier *CanonNNS = getCanonicalNestedNameSpecifier(NNS);
5607   if (CanonNNS == NNS) {
5608     QTN = new (*this, llvm::alignOf<DependentTemplateName>())
5609         DependentTemplateName(NNS, Name);
5610   } else {
5611     TemplateName Canon = getDependentTemplateName(CanonNNS, Name);
5612     QTN = new (*this, llvm::alignOf<DependentTemplateName>())
5613         DependentTemplateName(NNS, Name, Canon);
5614     DependentTemplateName *CheckQTN =
5615       DependentTemplateNames.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos);
5616     assert(!CheckQTN && "Dependent type name canonicalization broken");
5617     (void)CheckQTN;
5618   }
5619 
5620   DependentTemplateNames.InsertNode(QTN, InsertPos);
5621   return TemplateName(QTN);
5622 }
5623 
5624 /// \brief Retrieve the template name that represents a dependent
5625 /// template name such as \c MetaFun::template operator+.
5626 TemplateName
getDependentTemplateName(NestedNameSpecifier * NNS,OverloadedOperatorKind Operator) const5627 ASTContext::getDependentTemplateName(NestedNameSpecifier *NNS,
5628                                      OverloadedOperatorKind Operator) const {
5629   assert((!NNS || NNS->isDependent()) &&
5630          "Nested name specifier must be dependent");
5631 
5632   llvm::FoldingSetNodeID ID;
5633   DependentTemplateName::Profile(ID, NNS, Operator);
5634 
5635   void *InsertPos = 0;
5636   DependentTemplateName *QTN
5637     = DependentTemplateNames.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos);
5638 
5639   if (QTN)
5640     return TemplateName(QTN);
5641 
5642   NestedNameSpecifier *CanonNNS = getCanonicalNestedNameSpecifier(NNS);
5643   if (CanonNNS == NNS) {
5644     QTN = new (*this, llvm::alignOf<DependentTemplateName>())
5645         DependentTemplateName(NNS, Operator);
5646   } else {
5647     TemplateName Canon = getDependentTemplateName(CanonNNS, Operator);
5648     QTN = new (*this, llvm::alignOf<DependentTemplateName>())
5649         DependentTemplateName(NNS, Operator, Canon);
5650 
5651     DependentTemplateName *CheckQTN
5652       = DependentTemplateNames.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos);
5653     assert(!CheckQTN && "Dependent template name canonicalization broken");
5654     (void)CheckQTN;
5655   }
5656 
5657   DependentTemplateNames.InsertNode(QTN, InsertPos);
5658   return TemplateName(QTN);
5659 }
5660 
5661 TemplateName
getSubstTemplateTemplateParm(TemplateTemplateParmDecl * param,TemplateName replacement) const5662 ASTContext::getSubstTemplateTemplateParm(TemplateTemplateParmDecl *param,
5663                                          TemplateName replacement) const {
5664   llvm::FoldingSetNodeID ID;
5665   SubstTemplateTemplateParmStorage::Profile(ID, param, replacement);
5666 
5667   void *insertPos = 0;
5668   SubstTemplateTemplateParmStorage *subst
5669     = SubstTemplateTemplateParms.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, insertPos);
5670 
5671   if (!subst) {
5672     subst = new (*this) SubstTemplateTemplateParmStorage(param, replacement);
5673     SubstTemplateTemplateParms.InsertNode(subst, insertPos);
5674   }
5675 
5676   return TemplateName(subst);
5677 }
5678 
5679 TemplateName
getSubstTemplateTemplateParmPack(TemplateTemplateParmDecl * Param,const TemplateArgument & ArgPack) const5680 ASTContext::getSubstTemplateTemplateParmPack(TemplateTemplateParmDecl *Param,
5681                                        const TemplateArgument &ArgPack) const {
5682   ASTContext &Self = const_cast<ASTContext &>(*this);
5683   llvm::FoldingSetNodeID ID;
5684   SubstTemplateTemplateParmPackStorage::Profile(ID, Self, Param, ArgPack);
5685 
5686   void *InsertPos = 0;
5687   SubstTemplateTemplateParmPackStorage *Subst
5688     = SubstTemplateTemplateParmPacks.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos);
5689 
5690   if (!Subst) {
5691     Subst = new (*this) SubstTemplateTemplateParmPackStorage(Param,
5692                                                            ArgPack.pack_size(),
5693                                                          ArgPack.pack_begin());
5694     SubstTemplateTemplateParmPacks.InsertNode(Subst, InsertPos);
5695   }
5696 
5697   return TemplateName(Subst);
5698 }
5699 
5700 /// getFromTargetType - Given one of the integer types provided by
5701 /// TargetInfo, produce the corresponding type. The unsigned @p Type
5702 /// is actually a value of type @c TargetInfo::IntType.
getFromTargetType(unsigned Type) const5703 CanQualType ASTContext::getFromTargetType(unsigned Type) const {
5704   switch (Type) {
5705   case TargetInfo::NoInt: return CanQualType();
5706   case TargetInfo::SignedShort: return ShortTy;
5707   case TargetInfo::UnsignedShort: return UnsignedShortTy;
5708   case TargetInfo::SignedInt: return IntTy;
5709   case TargetInfo::UnsignedInt: return UnsignedIntTy;
5710   case TargetInfo::SignedLong: return LongTy;
5711   case TargetInfo::UnsignedLong: return UnsignedLongTy;
5712   case TargetInfo::SignedLongLong: return LongLongTy;
5713   case TargetInfo::UnsignedLongLong: return UnsignedLongLongTy;
5714   }
5715 
5716   llvm_unreachable("Unhandled TargetInfo::IntType value");
5717 }
5718 
5719 //===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
5720 //                        Type Predicates.
5721 //===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
5722 
5723 /// getObjCGCAttr - Returns one of GCNone, Weak or Strong objc's
5724 /// garbage collection attribute.
5725 ///
getObjCGCAttrKind(QualType Ty) const5726 Qualifiers::GC ASTContext::getObjCGCAttrKind(QualType Ty) const {
5727   if (getLangOpts().getGC() == LangOptions::NonGC)
5728     return Qualifiers::GCNone;
5729 
5730   assert(getLangOpts().ObjC1);
5731   Qualifiers::GC GCAttrs = Ty.getObjCGCAttr();
5732 
5733   // Default behaviour under objective-C's gc is for ObjC pointers
5734   // (or pointers to them) be treated as though they were declared
5735   // as __strong.
5736   if (GCAttrs == Qualifiers::GCNone) {
5737     if (Ty->isObjCObjectPointerType() || Ty->isBlockPointerType())
5738       return Qualifiers::Strong;
5739     else if (Ty->isPointerType())
5740       return getObjCGCAttrKind(Ty->getAs<PointerType>()->getPointeeType());
5741   } else {
5742     // It's not valid to set GC attributes on anything that isn't a
5743     // pointer.
5744 #ifndef NDEBUG
5745     QualType CT = Ty->getCanonicalTypeInternal();
5746     while (const ArrayType *AT = dyn_cast<ArrayType>(CT))
5747       CT = AT->getElementType();
5748     assert(CT->isAnyPointerType() || CT->isBlockPointerType());
5749 #endif
5750   }
5751   return GCAttrs;
5752 }
5753 
5754 //===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
5755 //                        Type Compatibility Testing
5756 //===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
5757 
5758 /// areCompatVectorTypes - Return true if the two specified vector types are
5759 /// compatible.
areCompatVectorTypes(const VectorType * LHS,const VectorType * RHS)5760 static bool areCompatVectorTypes(const VectorType *LHS,
5761                                  const VectorType *RHS) {
5762   assert(LHS->isCanonicalUnqualified() && RHS->isCanonicalUnqualified());
5763   return LHS->getElementType() == RHS->getElementType() &&
5764          LHS->getNumElements() == RHS->getNumElements();
5765 }
5766 
areCompatibleVectorTypes(QualType FirstVec,QualType SecondVec)5767 bool ASTContext::areCompatibleVectorTypes(QualType FirstVec,
5768                                           QualType SecondVec) {
5769   assert(FirstVec->isVectorType() && "FirstVec should be a vector type");
5770   assert(SecondVec->isVectorType() && "SecondVec should be a vector type");
5771 
5772   if (hasSameUnqualifiedType(FirstVec, SecondVec))
5773     return true;
5774 
5775   // Treat Neon vector types and most AltiVec vector types as if they are the
5776   // equivalent GCC vector types.
5777   const VectorType *First = FirstVec->getAs<VectorType>();
5778   const VectorType *Second = SecondVec->getAs<VectorType>();
5779   if (First->getNumElements() == Second->getNumElements() &&
5780       hasSameType(First->getElementType(), Second->getElementType()) &&
5781       First->getVectorKind() != VectorType::AltiVecPixel &&
5782       First->getVectorKind() != VectorType::AltiVecBool &&
5783       Second->getVectorKind() != VectorType::AltiVecPixel &&
5784       Second->getVectorKind() != VectorType::AltiVecBool)
5785     return true;
5786 
5787   return false;
5788 }
5789 
5790 //===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
5791 // ObjCQualifiedIdTypesAreCompatible - Compatibility testing for qualified id's.
5792 //===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
5793 
5794 /// ProtocolCompatibleWithProtocol - return 'true' if 'lProto' is in the
5795 /// inheritance hierarchy of 'rProto'.
5796 bool
ProtocolCompatibleWithProtocol(ObjCProtocolDecl * lProto,ObjCProtocolDecl * rProto) const5797 ASTContext::ProtocolCompatibleWithProtocol(ObjCProtocolDecl *lProto,
5798                                            ObjCProtocolDecl *rProto) const {
5799   if (declaresSameEntity(lProto, rProto))
5800     return true;
5801   for (ObjCProtocolDecl::protocol_iterator PI = rProto->protocol_begin(),
5802        E = rProto->protocol_end(); PI != E; ++PI)
5803     if (ProtocolCompatibleWithProtocol(lProto, *PI))
5804       return true;
5805   return false;
5806 }
5807 
5808 /// QualifiedIdConformsQualifiedId - compare id<pr,...> with id<pr1,...>
5809 /// return true if lhs's protocols conform to rhs's protocol; false
5810 /// otherwise.
QualifiedIdConformsQualifiedId(QualType lhs,QualType rhs)5811 bool ASTContext::QualifiedIdConformsQualifiedId(QualType lhs, QualType rhs) {
5812   if (lhs->isObjCQualifiedIdType() && rhs->isObjCQualifiedIdType())
5813     return ObjCQualifiedIdTypesAreCompatible(lhs, rhs, false);
5814   return false;
5815 }
5816 
5817 /// ObjCQualifiedClassTypesAreCompatible - compare  Class<pr,...> and
5818 /// Class<pr1, ...>.
ObjCQualifiedClassTypesAreCompatible(QualType lhs,QualType rhs)5819 bool ASTContext::ObjCQualifiedClassTypesAreCompatible(QualType lhs,
5820                                                       QualType rhs) {
5821   const ObjCObjectPointerType *lhsQID = lhs->getAs<ObjCObjectPointerType>();
5822   const ObjCObjectPointerType *rhsOPT = rhs->getAs<ObjCObjectPointerType>();
5823   assert ((lhsQID && rhsOPT) && "ObjCQualifiedClassTypesAreCompatible");
5824 
5825   for (ObjCObjectPointerType::qual_iterator I = lhsQID->qual_begin(),
5826        E = lhsQID->qual_end(); I != E; ++I) {
5827     bool match = false;
5828     ObjCProtocolDecl *lhsProto = *I;
5829     for (ObjCObjectPointerType::qual_iterator J = rhsOPT->qual_begin(),
5830          E = rhsOPT->qual_end(); J != E; ++J) {
5831       ObjCProtocolDecl *rhsProto = *J;
5832       if (ProtocolCompatibleWithProtocol(lhsProto, rhsProto)) {
5833         match = true;
5834         break;
5835       }
5836     }
5837     if (!match)
5838       return false;
5839   }
5840   return true;
5841 }
5842 
5843 /// ObjCQualifiedIdTypesAreCompatible - We know that one of lhs/rhs is an
5844 /// ObjCQualifiedIDType.
ObjCQualifiedIdTypesAreCompatible(QualType lhs,QualType rhs,bool compare)5845 bool ASTContext::ObjCQualifiedIdTypesAreCompatible(QualType lhs, QualType rhs,
5846                                                    bool compare) {
5847   // Allow id<P..> and an 'id' or void* type in all cases.
5848   if (lhs->isVoidPointerType() ||
5849       lhs->isObjCIdType() || lhs->isObjCClassType())
5850     return true;
5851   else if (rhs->isVoidPointerType() ||
5852            rhs->isObjCIdType() || rhs->isObjCClassType())
5853     return true;
5854 
5855   if (const ObjCObjectPointerType *lhsQID = lhs->getAsObjCQualifiedIdType()) {
5856     const ObjCObjectPointerType *rhsOPT = rhs->getAs<ObjCObjectPointerType>();
5857 
5858     if (!rhsOPT) return false;
5859 
5860     if (rhsOPT->qual_empty()) {
5861       // If the RHS is a unqualified interface pointer "NSString*",
5862       // make sure we check the class hierarchy.
5863       if (ObjCInterfaceDecl *rhsID = rhsOPT->getInterfaceDecl()) {
5864         for (ObjCObjectPointerType::qual_iterator I = lhsQID->qual_begin(),
5865              E = lhsQID->qual_end(); I != E; ++I) {
5866           // when comparing an id<P> on lhs with a static type on rhs,
5867           // see if static class implements all of id's protocols, directly or
5868           // through its super class and categories.
5869           if (!rhsID->ClassImplementsProtocol(*I, true))
5870             return false;
5871         }
5872       }
5873       // If there are no qualifiers and no interface, we have an 'id'.
5874       return true;
5875     }
5876     // Both the right and left sides have qualifiers.
5877     for (ObjCObjectPointerType::qual_iterator I = lhsQID->qual_begin(),
5878          E = lhsQID->qual_end(); I != E; ++I) {
5879       ObjCProtocolDecl *lhsProto = *I;
5880       bool match = false;
5881 
5882       // when comparing an id<P> on lhs with a static type on rhs,
5883       // see if static class implements all of id's protocols, directly or
5884       // through its super class and categories.
5885       for (ObjCObjectPointerType::qual_iterator J = rhsOPT->qual_begin(),
5886            E = rhsOPT->qual_end(); J != E; ++J) {
5887         ObjCProtocolDecl *rhsProto = *J;
5888         if (ProtocolCompatibleWithProtocol(lhsProto, rhsProto) ||
5889             (compare && ProtocolCompatibleWithProtocol(rhsProto, lhsProto))) {
5890           match = true;
5891           break;
5892         }
5893       }
5894       // If the RHS is a qualified interface pointer "NSString<P>*",
5895       // make sure we check the class hierarchy.
5896       if (ObjCInterfaceDecl *rhsID = rhsOPT->getInterfaceDecl()) {
5897         for (ObjCObjectPointerType::qual_iterator I = lhsQID->qual_begin(),
5898              E = lhsQID->qual_end(); I != E; ++I) {
5899           // when comparing an id<P> on lhs with a static type on rhs,
5900           // see if static class implements all of id's protocols, directly or
5901           // through its super class and categories.
5902           if (rhsID->ClassImplementsProtocol(*I, true)) {
5903             match = true;
5904             break;
5905           }
5906         }
5907       }
5908       if (!match)
5909         return false;
5910     }
5911 
5912     return true;
5913   }
5914 
5915   const ObjCObjectPointerType *rhsQID = rhs->getAsObjCQualifiedIdType();
5916   assert(rhsQID && "One of the LHS/RHS should be id<x>");
5917 
5918   if (const ObjCObjectPointerType *lhsOPT =
5919         lhs->getAsObjCInterfacePointerType()) {
5920     // If both the right and left sides have qualifiers.
5921     for (ObjCObjectPointerType::qual_iterator I = lhsOPT->qual_begin(),
5922          E = lhsOPT->qual_end(); I != E; ++I) {
5923       ObjCProtocolDecl *lhsProto = *I;
5924       bool match = false;
5925 
5926       // when comparing an id<P> on rhs with a static type on lhs,
5927       // see if static class implements all of id's protocols, directly or
5928       // through its super class and categories.
5929       // First, lhs protocols in the qualifier list must be found, direct
5930       // or indirect in rhs's qualifier list or it is a mismatch.
5931       for (ObjCObjectPointerType::qual_iterator J = rhsQID->qual_begin(),
5932            E = rhsQID->qual_end(); J != E; ++J) {
5933         ObjCProtocolDecl *rhsProto = *J;
5934         if (ProtocolCompatibleWithProtocol(lhsProto, rhsProto) ||
5935             (compare && ProtocolCompatibleWithProtocol(rhsProto, lhsProto))) {
5936           match = true;
5937           break;
5938         }
5939       }
5940       if (!match)
5941         return false;
5942     }
5943 
5944     // Static class's protocols, or its super class or category protocols
5945     // must be found, direct or indirect in rhs's qualifier list or it is a mismatch.
5946     if (ObjCInterfaceDecl *lhsID = lhsOPT->getInterfaceDecl()) {
5947       llvm::SmallPtrSet<ObjCProtocolDecl *, 8> LHSInheritedProtocols;
5948       CollectInheritedProtocols(lhsID, LHSInheritedProtocols);
5949       // This is rather dubious but matches gcc's behavior. If lhs has
5950       // no type qualifier and its class has no static protocol(s)
5951       // assume that it is mismatch.
5952       if (LHSInheritedProtocols.empty() && lhsOPT->qual_empty())
5953         return false;
5954       for (llvm::SmallPtrSet<ObjCProtocolDecl*,8>::iterator I =
5955            LHSInheritedProtocols.begin(),
5956            E = LHSInheritedProtocols.end(); I != E; ++I) {
5957         bool match = false;
5958         ObjCProtocolDecl *lhsProto = (*I);
5959         for (ObjCObjectPointerType::qual_iterator J = rhsQID->qual_begin(),
5960              E = rhsQID->qual_end(); J != E; ++J) {
5961           ObjCProtocolDecl *rhsProto = *J;
5962           if (ProtocolCompatibleWithProtocol(lhsProto, rhsProto) ||
5963               (compare && ProtocolCompatibleWithProtocol(rhsProto, lhsProto))) {
5964             match = true;
5965             break;
5966           }
5967         }
5968         if (!match)
5969           return false;
5970       }
5971     }
5972     return true;
5973   }
5974   return false;
5975 }
5976 
5977 /// canAssignObjCInterfaces - Return true if the two interface types are
5978 /// compatible for assignment from RHS to LHS.  This handles validation of any
5979 /// protocol qualifiers on the LHS or RHS.
5980 ///
canAssignObjCInterfaces(const ObjCObjectPointerType * LHSOPT,const ObjCObjectPointerType * RHSOPT)5981 bool ASTContext::canAssignObjCInterfaces(const ObjCObjectPointerType *LHSOPT,
5982                                          const ObjCObjectPointerType *RHSOPT) {
5983   const ObjCObjectType* LHS = LHSOPT->getObjectType();
5984   const ObjCObjectType* RHS = RHSOPT->getObjectType();
5985 
5986   // If either type represents the built-in 'id' or 'Class' types, return true.
5987   if (LHS->isObjCUnqualifiedIdOrClass() ||
5988       RHS->isObjCUnqualifiedIdOrClass())
5989     return true;
5990 
5991   if (LHS->isObjCQualifiedId() || RHS->isObjCQualifiedId())
5992     return ObjCQualifiedIdTypesAreCompatible(QualType(LHSOPT,0),
5993                                              QualType(RHSOPT,0),
5994                                              false);
5995 
5996   if (LHS->isObjCQualifiedClass() && RHS->isObjCQualifiedClass())
5997     return ObjCQualifiedClassTypesAreCompatible(QualType(LHSOPT,0),
5998                                                 QualType(RHSOPT,0));
5999 
6000   // If we have 2 user-defined types, fall into that path.
6001   if (LHS->getInterface() && RHS->getInterface())
6002     return canAssignObjCInterfaces(LHS, RHS);
6003 
6004   return false;
6005 }
6006 
6007 /// canAssignObjCInterfacesInBlockPointer - This routine is specifically written
6008 /// for providing type-safety for objective-c pointers used to pass/return
6009 /// arguments in block literals. When passed as arguments, passing 'A*' where
6010 /// 'id' is expected is not OK. Passing 'Sub *" where 'Super *" is expected is
6011 /// not OK. For the return type, the opposite is not OK.
canAssignObjCInterfacesInBlockPointer(const ObjCObjectPointerType * LHSOPT,const ObjCObjectPointerType * RHSOPT,bool BlockReturnType)6012 bool ASTContext::canAssignObjCInterfacesInBlockPointer(
6013                                          const ObjCObjectPointerType *LHSOPT,
6014                                          const ObjCObjectPointerType *RHSOPT,
6015                                          bool BlockReturnType) {
6016   if (RHSOPT->isObjCBuiltinType() || LHSOPT->isObjCIdType())
6017     return true;
6018 
6019   if (LHSOPT->isObjCBuiltinType()) {
6020     return RHSOPT->isObjCBuiltinType() || RHSOPT->isObjCQualifiedIdType();
6021   }
6022 
6023   if (LHSOPT->isObjCQualifiedIdType() || RHSOPT->isObjCQualifiedIdType())
6024     return ObjCQualifiedIdTypesAreCompatible(QualType(LHSOPT,0),
6025                                              QualType(RHSOPT,0),
6026                                              false);
6027 
6028   const ObjCInterfaceType* LHS = LHSOPT->getInterfaceType();
6029   const ObjCInterfaceType* RHS = RHSOPT->getInterfaceType();
6030   if (LHS && RHS)  { // We have 2 user-defined types.
6031     if (LHS != RHS) {
6032       if (LHS->getDecl()->isSuperClassOf(RHS->getDecl()))
6033         return BlockReturnType;
6034       if (RHS->getDecl()->isSuperClassOf(LHS->getDecl()))
6035         return !BlockReturnType;
6036     }
6037     else
6038       return true;
6039   }
6040   return false;
6041 }
6042 
6043 /// getIntersectionOfProtocols - This routine finds the intersection of set
6044 /// of protocols inherited from two distinct objective-c pointer objects.
6045 /// It is used to build composite qualifier list of the composite type of
6046 /// the conditional expression involving two objective-c pointer objects.
6047 static
getIntersectionOfProtocols(ASTContext & Context,const ObjCObjectPointerType * LHSOPT,const ObjCObjectPointerType * RHSOPT,SmallVectorImpl<ObjCProtocolDecl * > & IntersectionOfProtocols)6048 void getIntersectionOfProtocols(ASTContext &Context,
6049                                 const ObjCObjectPointerType *LHSOPT,
6050                                 const ObjCObjectPointerType *RHSOPT,
6051       SmallVectorImpl<ObjCProtocolDecl *> &IntersectionOfProtocols) {
6052 
6053   const ObjCObjectType* LHS = LHSOPT->getObjectType();
6054   const ObjCObjectType* RHS = RHSOPT->getObjectType();
6055   assert(LHS->getInterface() && "LHS must have an interface base");
6056   assert(RHS->getInterface() && "RHS must have an interface base");
6057 
6058   llvm::SmallPtrSet<ObjCProtocolDecl *, 8> InheritedProtocolSet;
6059   unsigned LHSNumProtocols = LHS->getNumProtocols();
6060   if (LHSNumProtocols > 0)
6061     InheritedProtocolSet.insert(LHS->qual_begin(), LHS->qual_end());
6062   else {
6063     llvm::SmallPtrSet<ObjCProtocolDecl *, 8> LHSInheritedProtocols;
6064     Context.CollectInheritedProtocols(LHS->getInterface(),
6065                                       LHSInheritedProtocols);
6066     InheritedProtocolSet.insert(LHSInheritedProtocols.begin(),
6067                                 LHSInheritedProtocols.end());
6068   }
6069 
6070   unsigned RHSNumProtocols = RHS->getNumProtocols();
6071   if (RHSNumProtocols > 0) {
6072     ObjCProtocolDecl **RHSProtocols =
6073       const_cast<ObjCProtocolDecl **>(RHS->qual_begin());
6074     for (unsigned i = 0; i < RHSNumProtocols; ++i)
6075       if (InheritedProtocolSet.count(RHSProtocols[i]))
6076         IntersectionOfProtocols.push_back(RHSProtocols[i]);
6077   } else {
6078     llvm::SmallPtrSet<ObjCProtocolDecl *, 8> RHSInheritedProtocols;
6079     Context.CollectInheritedProtocols(RHS->getInterface(),
6080                                       RHSInheritedProtocols);
6081     for (llvm::SmallPtrSet<ObjCProtocolDecl*,8>::iterator I =
6082          RHSInheritedProtocols.begin(),
6083          E = RHSInheritedProtocols.end(); I != E; ++I)
6084       if (InheritedProtocolSet.count((*I)))
6085         IntersectionOfProtocols.push_back((*I));
6086   }
6087 }
6088 
6089 /// areCommonBaseCompatible - Returns common base class of the two classes if
6090 /// one found. Note that this is O'2 algorithm. But it will be called as the
6091 /// last type comparison in a ?-exp of ObjC pointer types before a
6092 /// warning is issued. So, its invokation is extremely rare.
areCommonBaseCompatible(const ObjCObjectPointerType * Lptr,const ObjCObjectPointerType * Rptr)6093 QualType ASTContext::areCommonBaseCompatible(
6094                                           const ObjCObjectPointerType *Lptr,
6095                                           const ObjCObjectPointerType *Rptr) {
6096   const ObjCObjectType *LHS = Lptr->getObjectType();
6097   const ObjCObjectType *RHS = Rptr->getObjectType();
6098   const ObjCInterfaceDecl* LDecl = LHS->getInterface();
6099   const ObjCInterfaceDecl* RDecl = RHS->getInterface();
6100   if (!LDecl || !RDecl || (declaresSameEntity(LDecl, RDecl)))
6101     return QualType();
6102 
6103   do {
6104     LHS = cast<ObjCInterfaceType>(getObjCInterfaceType(LDecl));
6105     if (canAssignObjCInterfaces(LHS, RHS)) {
6106       SmallVector<ObjCProtocolDecl *, 8> Protocols;
6107       getIntersectionOfProtocols(*this, Lptr, Rptr, Protocols);
6108 
6109       QualType Result = QualType(LHS, 0);
6110       if (!Protocols.empty())
6111         Result = getObjCObjectType(Result, Protocols.data(), Protocols.size());
6112       Result = getObjCObjectPointerType(Result);
6113       return Result;
6114     }
6115   } while ((LDecl = LDecl->getSuperClass()));
6116 
6117   return QualType();
6118 }
6119 
canAssignObjCInterfaces(const ObjCObjectType * LHS,const ObjCObjectType * RHS)6120 bool ASTContext::canAssignObjCInterfaces(const ObjCObjectType *LHS,
6121                                          const ObjCObjectType *RHS) {
6122   assert(LHS->getInterface() && "LHS is not an interface type");
6123   assert(RHS->getInterface() && "RHS is not an interface type");
6124 
6125   // Verify that the base decls are compatible: the RHS must be a subclass of
6126   // the LHS.
6127   if (!LHS->getInterface()->isSuperClassOf(RHS->getInterface()))
6128     return false;
6129 
6130   // RHS must have a superset of the protocols in the LHS.  If the LHS is not
6131   // protocol qualified at all, then we are good.
6132   if (LHS->getNumProtocols() == 0)
6133     return true;
6134 
6135   // Okay, we know the LHS has protocol qualifiers.  If the RHS doesn't,
6136   // more detailed analysis is required.
6137   if (RHS->getNumProtocols() == 0) {
6138     // OK, if LHS is a superclass of RHS *and*
6139     // this superclass is assignment compatible with LHS.
6140     // false otherwise.
6141     bool IsSuperClass =
6142       LHS->getInterface()->isSuperClassOf(RHS->getInterface());
6143     if (IsSuperClass) {
6144       // OK if conversion of LHS to SuperClass results in narrowing of types
6145       // ; i.e., SuperClass may implement at least one of the protocols
6146       // in LHS's protocol list. Example, SuperObj<P1> = lhs<P1,P2> is ok.
6147       // But not SuperObj<P1,P2,P3> = lhs<P1,P2>.
6148       llvm::SmallPtrSet<ObjCProtocolDecl *, 8> SuperClassInheritedProtocols;
6149       CollectInheritedProtocols(RHS->getInterface(), SuperClassInheritedProtocols);
6150       // If super class has no protocols, it is not a match.
6151       if (SuperClassInheritedProtocols.empty())
6152         return false;
6153 
6154       for (ObjCObjectType::qual_iterator LHSPI = LHS->qual_begin(),
6155            LHSPE = LHS->qual_end();
6156            LHSPI != LHSPE; LHSPI++) {
6157         bool SuperImplementsProtocol = false;
6158         ObjCProtocolDecl *LHSProto = (*LHSPI);
6159 
6160         for (llvm::SmallPtrSet<ObjCProtocolDecl*,8>::iterator I =
6161              SuperClassInheritedProtocols.begin(),
6162              E = SuperClassInheritedProtocols.end(); I != E; ++I) {
6163           ObjCProtocolDecl *SuperClassProto = (*I);
6164           if (SuperClassProto->lookupProtocolNamed(LHSProto->getIdentifier())) {
6165             SuperImplementsProtocol = true;
6166             break;
6167           }
6168         }
6169         if (!SuperImplementsProtocol)
6170           return false;
6171       }
6172       return true;
6173     }
6174     return false;
6175   }
6176 
6177   for (ObjCObjectType::qual_iterator LHSPI = LHS->qual_begin(),
6178                                      LHSPE = LHS->qual_end();
6179        LHSPI != LHSPE; LHSPI++) {
6180     bool RHSImplementsProtocol = false;
6181 
6182     // If the RHS doesn't implement the protocol on the left, the types
6183     // are incompatible.
6184     for (ObjCObjectType::qual_iterator RHSPI = RHS->qual_begin(),
6185                                        RHSPE = RHS->qual_end();
6186          RHSPI != RHSPE; RHSPI++) {
6187       if ((*RHSPI)->lookupProtocolNamed((*LHSPI)->getIdentifier())) {
6188         RHSImplementsProtocol = true;
6189         break;
6190       }
6191     }
6192     // FIXME: For better diagnostics, consider passing back the protocol name.
6193     if (!RHSImplementsProtocol)
6194       return false;
6195   }
6196   // The RHS implements all protocols listed on the LHS.
6197   return true;
6198 }
6199 
areComparableObjCPointerTypes(QualType LHS,QualType RHS)6200 bool ASTContext::areComparableObjCPointerTypes(QualType LHS, QualType RHS) {
6201   // get the "pointed to" types
6202   const ObjCObjectPointerType *LHSOPT = LHS->getAs<ObjCObjectPointerType>();
6203   const ObjCObjectPointerType *RHSOPT = RHS->getAs<ObjCObjectPointerType>();
6204 
6205   if (!LHSOPT || !RHSOPT)
6206     return false;
6207 
6208   return canAssignObjCInterfaces(LHSOPT, RHSOPT) ||
6209          canAssignObjCInterfaces(RHSOPT, LHSOPT);
6210 }
6211 
canBindObjCObjectType(QualType To,QualType From)6212 bool ASTContext::canBindObjCObjectType(QualType To, QualType From) {
6213   return canAssignObjCInterfaces(
6214                 getObjCObjectPointerType(To)->getAs<ObjCObjectPointerType>(),
6215                 getObjCObjectPointerType(From)->getAs<ObjCObjectPointerType>());
6216 }
6217 
6218 /// typesAreCompatible - C99 6.7.3p9: For two qualified types to be compatible,
6219 /// both shall have the identically qualified version of a compatible type.
6220 /// C99 6.2.7p1: Two types have compatible types if their types are the
6221 /// same. See 6.7.[2,3,5] for additional rules.
typesAreCompatible(QualType LHS,QualType RHS,bool CompareUnqualified)6222 bool ASTContext::typesAreCompatible(QualType LHS, QualType RHS,
6223                                     bool CompareUnqualified) {
6224   if (getLangOpts().CPlusPlus)
6225     return hasSameType(LHS, RHS);
6226 
6227   return !mergeTypes(LHS, RHS, false, CompareUnqualified).isNull();
6228 }
6229 
propertyTypesAreCompatible(QualType LHS,QualType RHS)6230 bool ASTContext::propertyTypesAreCompatible(QualType LHS, QualType RHS) {
6231   return typesAreCompatible(LHS, RHS);
6232 }
6233 
typesAreBlockPointerCompatible(QualType LHS,QualType RHS)6234 bool ASTContext::typesAreBlockPointerCompatible(QualType LHS, QualType RHS) {
6235   return !mergeTypes(LHS, RHS, true).isNull();
6236 }
6237 
6238 /// mergeTransparentUnionType - if T is a transparent union type and a member
6239 /// of T is compatible with SubType, return the merged type, else return
6240 /// QualType()
mergeTransparentUnionType(QualType T,QualType SubType,bool OfBlockPointer,bool Unqualified)6241 QualType ASTContext::mergeTransparentUnionType(QualType T, QualType SubType,
6242                                                bool OfBlockPointer,
6243                                                bool Unqualified) {
6244   if (const RecordType *UT = T->getAsUnionType()) {
6245     RecordDecl *UD = UT->getDecl();
6246     if (UD->hasAttr<TransparentUnionAttr>()) {
6247       for (RecordDecl::field_iterator it = UD->field_begin(),
6248            itend = UD->field_end(); it != itend; ++it) {
6249         QualType ET = it->getType().getUnqualifiedType();
6250         QualType MT = mergeTypes(ET, SubType, OfBlockPointer, Unqualified);
6251         if (!MT.isNull())
6252           return MT;
6253       }
6254     }
6255   }
6256 
6257   return QualType();
6258 }
6259 
6260 /// mergeFunctionArgumentTypes - merge two types which appear as function
6261 /// argument types
mergeFunctionArgumentTypes(QualType lhs,QualType rhs,bool OfBlockPointer,bool Unqualified)6262 QualType ASTContext::mergeFunctionArgumentTypes(QualType lhs, QualType rhs,
6263                                                 bool OfBlockPointer,
6264                                                 bool Unqualified) {
6265   // GNU extension: two types are compatible if they appear as a function
6266   // argument, one of the types is a transparent union type and the other
6267   // type is compatible with a union member
6268   QualType lmerge = mergeTransparentUnionType(lhs, rhs, OfBlockPointer,
6269                                               Unqualified);
6270   if (!lmerge.isNull())
6271     return lmerge;
6272 
6273   QualType rmerge = mergeTransparentUnionType(rhs, lhs, OfBlockPointer,
6274                                               Unqualified);
6275   if (!rmerge.isNull())
6276     return rmerge;
6277 
6278   return mergeTypes(lhs, rhs, OfBlockPointer, Unqualified);
6279 }
6280 
mergeFunctionTypes(QualType lhs,QualType rhs,bool OfBlockPointer,bool Unqualified)6281 QualType ASTContext::mergeFunctionTypes(QualType lhs, QualType rhs,
6282                                         bool OfBlockPointer,
6283                                         bool Unqualified) {
6284   const FunctionType *lbase = lhs->getAs<FunctionType>();
6285   const FunctionType *rbase = rhs->getAs<FunctionType>();
6286   const FunctionProtoType *lproto = dyn_cast<FunctionProtoType>(lbase);
6287   const FunctionProtoType *rproto = dyn_cast<FunctionProtoType>(rbase);
6288   bool allLTypes = true;
6289   bool allRTypes = true;
6290 
6291   // Check return type
6292   QualType retType;
6293   if (OfBlockPointer) {
6294     QualType RHS = rbase->getResultType();
6295     QualType LHS = lbase->getResultType();
6296     bool UnqualifiedResult = Unqualified;
6297     if (!UnqualifiedResult)
6298       UnqualifiedResult = (!RHS.hasQualifiers() && LHS.hasQualifiers());
6299     retType = mergeTypes(LHS, RHS, true, UnqualifiedResult, true);
6300   }
6301   else
6302     retType = mergeTypes(lbase->getResultType(), rbase->getResultType(), false,
6303                          Unqualified);
6304   if (retType.isNull()) return QualType();
6305 
6306   if (Unqualified)
6307     retType = retType.getUnqualifiedType();
6308 
6309   CanQualType LRetType = getCanonicalType(lbase->getResultType());
6310   CanQualType RRetType = getCanonicalType(rbase->getResultType());
6311   if (Unqualified) {
6312     LRetType = LRetType.getUnqualifiedType();
6313     RRetType = RRetType.getUnqualifiedType();
6314   }
6315 
6316   if (getCanonicalType(retType) != LRetType)
6317     allLTypes = false;
6318   if (getCanonicalType(retType) != RRetType)
6319     allRTypes = false;
6320 
6321   // FIXME: double check this
6322   // FIXME: should we error if lbase->getRegParmAttr() != 0 &&
6323   //                           rbase->getRegParmAttr() != 0 &&
6324   //                           lbase->getRegParmAttr() != rbase->getRegParmAttr()?
6325   FunctionType::ExtInfo lbaseInfo = lbase->getExtInfo();
6326   FunctionType::ExtInfo rbaseInfo = rbase->getExtInfo();
6327 
6328   // Compatible functions must have compatible calling conventions
6329   if (!isSameCallConv(lbaseInfo.getCC(), rbaseInfo.getCC()))
6330     return QualType();
6331 
6332   // Regparm is part of the calling convention.
6333   if (lbaseInfo.getHasRegParm() != rbaseInfo.getHasRegParm())
6334     return QualType();
6335   if (lbaseInfo.getRegParm() != rbaseInfo.getRegParm())
6336     return QualType();
6337 
6338   if (lbaseInfo.getProducesResult() != rbaseInfo.getProducesResult())
6339     return QualType();
6340 
6341   // functypes which return are preferred over those that do not.
6342   if (lbaseInfo.getNoReturn() && !rbaseInfo.getNoReturn())
6343     allLTypes = false;
6344   else if (!lbaseInfo.getNoReturn() && rbaseInfo.getNoReturn())
6345     allRTypes = false;
6346   // FIXME: some uses, e.g. conditional exprs, really want this to be 'both'.
6347   bool NoReturn = lbaseInfo.getNoReturn() || rbaseInfo.getNoReturn();
6348 
6349   FunctionType::ExtInfo einfo = lbaseInfo.withNoReturn(NoReturn);
6350 
6351   if (lproto && rproto) { // two C99 style function prototypes
6352     assert(!lproto->hasExceptionSpec() && !rproto->hasExceptionSpec() &&
6353            "C++ shouldn't be here");
6354     unsigned lproto_nargs = lproto->getNumArgs();
6355     unsigned rproto_nargs = rproto->getNumArgs();
6356 
6357     // Compatible functions must have the same number of arguments
6358     if (lproto_nargs != rproto_nargs)
6359       return QualType();
6360 
6361     // Variadic and non-variadic functions aren't compatible
6362     if (lproto->isVariadic() != rproto->isVariadic())
6363       return QualType();
6364 
6365     if (lproto->getTypeQuals() != rproto->getTypeQuals())
6366       return QualType();
6367 
6368     if (LangOpts.ObjCAutoRefCount &&
6369         !FunctionTypesMatchOnNSConsumedAttrs(rproto, lproto))
6370       return QualType();
6371 
6372     // Check argument compatibility
6373     SmallVector<QualType, 10> types;
6374     for (unsigned i = 0; i < lproto_nargs; i++) {
6375       QualType largtype = lproto->getArgType(i).getUnqualifiedType();
6376       QualType rargtype = rproto->getArgType(i).getUnqualifiedType();
6377       QualType argtype = mergeFunctionArgumentTypes(largtype, rargtype,
6378                                                     OfBlockPointer,
6379                                                     Unqualified);
6380       if (argtype.isNull()) return QualType();
6381 
6382       if (Unqualified)
6383         argtype = argtype.getUnqualifiedType();
6384 
6385       types.push_back(argtype);
6386       if (Unqualified) {
6387         largtype = largtype.getUnqualifiedType();
6388         rargtype = rargtype.getUnqualifiedType();
6389       }
6390 
6391       if (getCanonicalType(argtype) != getCanonicalType(largtype))
6392         allLTypes = false;
6393       if (getCanonicalType(argtype) != getCanonicalType(rargtype))
6394         allRTypes = false;
6395     }
6396 
6397     if (allLTypes) return lhs;
6398     if (allRTypes) return rhs;
6399 
6400     FunctionProtoType::ExtProtoInfo EPI = lproto->getExtProtoInfo();
6401     EPI.ExtInfo = einfo;
6402     return getFunctionType(retType, types.begin(), types.size(), EPI);
6403   }
6404 
6405   if (lproto) allRTypes = false;
6406   if (rproto) allLTypes = false;
6407 
6408   const FunctionProtoType *proto = lproto ? lproto : rproto;
6409   if (proto) {
6410     assert(!proto->hasExceptionSpec() && "C++ shouldn't be here");
6411     if (proto->isVariadic()) return QualType();
6412     // Check that the types are compatible with the types that
6413     // would result from default argument promotions (C99 6.7.5.3p15).
6414     // The only types actually affected are promotable integer
6415     // types and floats, which would be passed as a different
6416     // type depending on whether the prototype is visible.
6417     unsigned proto_nargs = proto->getNumArgs();
6418     for (unsigned i = 0; i < proto_nargs; ++i) {
6419       QualType argTy = proto->getArgType(i);
6420 
6421       // Look at the converted type of enum types, since that is the type used
6422       // to pass enum values.
6423       if (const EnumType *Enum = argTy->getAs<EnumType>()) {
6424         argTy = Enum->getDecl()->getIntegerType();
6425         if (argTy.isNull())
6426           return QualType();
6427       }
6428 
6429       if (argTy->isPromotableIntegerType() ||
6430           getCanonicalType(argTy).getUnqualifiedType() == FloatTy)
6431         return QualType();
6432     }
6433 
6434     if (allLTypes) return lhs;
6435     if (allRTypes) return rhs;
6436 
6437     FunctionProtoType::ExtProtoInfo EPI = proto->getExtProtoInfo();
6438     EPI.ExtInfo = einfo;
6439     return getFunctionType(retType, proto->arg_type_begin(),
6440                            proto->getNumArgs(), EPI);
6441   }
6442 
6443   if (allLTypes) return lhs;
6444   if (allRTypes) return rhs;
6445   return getFunctionNoProtoType(retType, einfo);
6446 }
6447 
mergeTypes(QualType LHS,QualType RHS,bool OfBlockPointer,bool Unqualified,bool BlockReturnType)6448 QualType ASTContext::mergeTypes(QualType LHS, QualType RHS,
6449                                 bool OfBlockPointer,
6450                                 bool Unqualified, bool BlockReturnType) {
6451   // C++ [expr]: If an expression initially has the type "reference to T", the
6452   // type is adjusted to "T" prior to any further analysis, the expression
6453   // designates the object or function denoted by the reference, and the
6454   // expression is an lvalue unless the reference is an rvalue reference and
6455   // the expression is a function call (possibly inside parentheses).
6456   assert(!LHS->getAs<ReferenceType>() && "LHS is a reference type?");
6457   assert(!RHS->getAs<ReferenceType>() && "RHS is a reference type?");
6458 
6459   if (Unqualified) {
6460     LHS = LHS.getUnqualifiedType();
6461     RHS = RHS.getUnqualifiedType();
6462   }
6463 
6464   QualType LHSCan = getCanonicalType(LHS),
6465            RHSCan = getCanonicalType(RHS);
6466 
6467   // If two types are identical, they are compatible.
6468   if (LHSCan == RHSCan)
6469     return LHS;
6470 
6471   // If the qualifiers are different, the types aren't compatible... mostly.
6472   Qualifiers LQuals = LHSCan.getLocalQualifiers();
6473   Qualifiers RQuals = RHSCan.getLocalQualifiers();
6474   if (LQuals != RQuals) {
6475     // If any of these qualifiers are different, we have a type
6476     // mismatch.
6477     if (LQuals.getCVRQualifiers() != RQuals.getCVRQualifiers() ||
6478         LQuals.getAddressSpace() != RQuals.getAddressSpace() ||
6479         LQuals.getObjCLifetime() != RQuals.getObjCLifetime())
6480       return QualType();
6481 
6482     // Exactly one GC qualifier difference is allowed: __strong is
6483     // okay if the other type has no GC qualifier but is an Objective
6484     // C object pointer (i.e. implicitly strong by default).  We fix
6485     // this by pretending that the unqualified type was actually
6486     // qualified __strong.
6487     Qualifiers::GC GC_L = LQuals.getObjCGCAttr();
6488     Qualifiers::GC GC_R = RQuals.getObjCGCAttr();
6489     assert((GC_L != GC_R) && "unequal qualifier sets had only equal elements");
6490 
6491     if (GC_L == Qualifiers::Weak || GC_R == Qualifiers::Weak)
6492       return QualType();
6493 
6494     if (GC_L == Qualifiers::Strong && RHSCan->isObjCObjectPointerType()) {
6495       return mergeTypes(LHS, getObjCGCQualType(RHS, Qualifiers::Strong));
6496     }
6497     if (GC_R == Qualifiers::Strong && LHSCan->isObjCObjectPointerType()) {
6498       return mergeTypes(getObjCGCQualType(LHS, Qualifiers::Strong), RHS);
6499     }
6500     return QualType();
6501   }
6502 
6503   // Okay, qualifiers are equal.
6504 
6505   Type::TypeClass LHSClass = LHSCan->getTypeClass();
6506   Type::TypeClass RHSClass = RHSCan->getTypeClass();
6507 
6508   // We want to consider the two function types to be the same for these
6509   // comparisons, just force one to the other.
6510   if (LHSClass == Type::FunctionProto) LHSClass = Type::FunctionNoProto;
6511   if (RHSClass == Type::FunctionProto) RHSClass = Type::FunctionNoProto;
6512 
6513   // Same as above for arrays
6514   if (LHSClass == Type::VariableArray || LHSClass == Type::IncompleteArray)
6515     LHSClass = Type::ConstantArray;
6516   if (RHSClass == Type::VariableArray || RHSClass == Type::IncompleteArray)
6517     RHSClass = Type::ConstantArray;
6518 
6519   // ObjCInterfaces are just specialized ObjCObjects.
6520   if (LHSClass == Type::ObjCInterface) LHSClass = Type::ObjCObject;
6521   if (RHSClass == Type::ObjCInterface) RHSClass = Type::ObjCObject;
6522 
6523   // Canonicalize ExtVector -> Vector.
6524   if (LHSClass == Type::ExtVector) LHSClass = Type::Vector;
6525   if (RHSClass == Type::ExtVector) RHSClass = Type::Vector;
6526 
6527   // If the canonical type classes don't match.
6528   if (LHSClass != RHSClass) {
6529     // C99 6.7.2.2p4: Each enumerated type shall be compatible with char,
6530     // a signed integer type, or an unsigned integer type.
6531     // Compatibility is based on the underlying type, not the promotion
6532     // type.
6533     if (const EnumType* ETy = LHS->getAs<EnumType>()) {
6534       QualType TINT = ETy->getDecl()->getIntegerType();
6535       if (!TINT.isNull() && hasSameType(TINT, RHSCan.getUnqualifiedType()))
6536         return RHS;
6537     }
6538     if (const EnumType* ETy = RHS->getAs<EnumType>()) {
6539       QualType TINT = ETy->getDecl()->getIntegerType();
6540       if (!TINT.isNull() && hasSameType(TINT, LHSCan.getUnqualifiedType()))
6541         return LHS;
6542     }
6543     // allow block pointer type to match an 'id' type.
6544     if (OfBlockPointer && !BlockReturnType) {
6545        if (LHS->isObjCIdType() && RHS->isBlockPointerType())
6546          return LHS;
6547       if (RHS->isObjCIdType() && LHS->isBlockPointerType())
6548         return RHS;
6549     }
6550 
6551     return QualType();
6552   }
6553 
6554   // The canonical type classes match.
6555   switch (LHSClass) {
6556 #define TYPE(Class, Base)
6557 #define ABSTRACT_TYPE(Class, Base)
6558 #define NON_CANONICAL_UNLESS_DEPENDENT_TYPE(Class, Base) case Type::Class:
6559 #define NON_CANONICAL_TYPE(Class, Base) case Type::Class:
6560 #define DEPENDENT_TYPE(Class, Base) case Type::Class:
6561 #include "clang/AST/TypeNodes.def"
6562     llvm_unreachable("Non-canonical and dependent types shouldn't get here");
6563 
6564   case Type::LValueReference:
6565   case Type::RValueReference:
6566   case Type::MemberPointer:
6567     llvm_unreachable("C++ should never be in mergeTypes");
6568 
6569   case Type::ObjCInterface:
6570   case Type::IncompleteArray:
6571   case Type::VariableArray:
6572   case Type::FunctionProto:
6573   case Type::ExtVector:
6574     llvm_unreachable("Types are eliminated above");
6575 
6576   case Type::Pointer:
6577   {
6578     // Merge two pointer types, while trying to preserve typedef info
6579     QualType LHSPointee = LHS->getAs<PointerType>()->getPointeeType();
6580     QualType RHSPointee = RHS->getAs<PointerType>()->getPointeeType();
6581     if (Unqualified) {
6582       LHSPointee = LHSPointee.getUnqualifiedType();
6583       RHSPointee = RHSPointee.getUnqualifiedType();
6584     }
6585     QualType ResultType = mergeTypes(LHSPointee, RHSPointee, false,
6586                                      Unqualified);
6587     if (ResultType.isNull()) return QualType();
6588     if (getCanonicalType(LHSPointee) == getCanonicalType(ResultType))
6589       return LHS;
6590     if (getCanonicalType(RHSPointee) == getCanonicalType(ResultType))
6591       return RHS;
6592     return getPointerType(ResultType);
6593   }
6594   case Type::BlockPointer:
6595   {
6596     // Merge two block pointer types, while trying to preserve typedef info
6597     QualType LHSPointee = LHS->getAs<BlockPointerType>()->getPointeeType();
6598     QualType RHSPointee = RHS->getAs<BlockPointerType>()->getPointeeType();
6599     if (Unqualified) {
6600       LHSPointee = LHSPointee.getUnqualifiedType();
6601       RHSPointee = RHSPointee.getUnqualifiedType();
6602     }
6603     QualType ResultType = mergeTypes(LHSPointee, RHSPointee, OfBlockPointer,
6604                                      Unqualified);
6605     if (ResultType.isNull()) return QualType();
6606     if (getCanonicalType(LHSPointee) == getCanonicalType(ResultType))
6607       return LHS;
6608     if (getCanonicalType(RHSPointee) == getCanonicalType(ResultType))
6609       return RHS;
6610     return getBlockPointerType(ResultType);
6611   }
6612   case Type::Atomic:
6613   {
6614     // Merge two pointer types, while trying to preserve typedef info
6615     QualType LHSValue = LHS->getAs<AtomicType>()->getValueType();
6616     QualType RHSValue = RHS->getAs<AtomicType>()->getValueType();
6617     if (Unqualified) {
6618       LHSValue = LHSValue.getUnqualifiedType();
6619       RHSValue = RHSValue.getUnqualifiedType();
6620     }
6621     QualType ResultType = mergeTypes(LHSValue, RHSValue, false,
6622                                      Unqualified);
6623     if (ResultType.isNull()) return QualType();
6624     if (getCanonicalType(LHSValue) == getCanonicalType(ResultType))
6625       return LHS;
6626     if (getCanonicalType(RHSValue) == getCanonicalType(ResultType))
6627       return RHS;
6628     return getAtomicType(ResultType);
6629   }
6630   case Type::ConstantArray:
6631   {
6632     const ConstantArrayType* LCAT = getAsConstantArrayType(LHS);
6633     const ConstantArrayType* RCAT = getAsConstantArrayType(RHS);
6634     if (LCAT && RCAT && RCAT->getSize() != LCAT->getSize())
6635       return QualType();
6636 
6637     QualType LHSElem = getAsArrayType(LHS)->getElementType();
6638     QualType RHSElem = getAsArrayType(RHS)->getElementType();
6639     if (Unqualified) {
6640       LHSElem = LHSElem.getUnqualifiedType();
6641       RHSElem = RHSElem.getUnqualifiedType();
6642     }
6643 
6644     QualType ResultType = mergeTypes(LHSElem, RHSElem, false, Unqualified);
6645     if (ResultType.isNull()) return QualType();
6646     if (LCAT && getCanonicalType(LHSElem) == getCanonicalType(ResultType))
6647       return LHS;
6648     if (RCAT && getCanonicalType(RHSElem) == getCanonicalType(ResultType))
6649       return RHS;
6650     if (LCAT) return getConstantArrayType(ResultType, LCAT->getSize(),
6651                                           ArrayType::ArraySizeModifier(), 0);
6652     if (RCAT) return getConstantArrayType(ResultType, RCAT->getSize(),
6653                                           ArrayType::ArraySizeModifier(), 0);
6654     const VariableArrayType* LVAT = getAsVariableArrayType(LHS);
6655     const VariableArrayType* RVAT = getAsVariableArrayType(RHS);
6656     if (LVAT && getCanonicalType(LHSElem) == getCanonicalType(ResultType))
6657       return LHS;
6658     if (RVAT && getCanonicalType(RHSElem) == getCanonicalType(ResultType))
6659       return RHS;
6660     if (LVAT) {
6661       // FIXME: This isn't correct! But tricky to implement because
6662       // the array's size has to be the size of LHS, but the type
6663       // has to be different.
6664       return LHS;
6665     }
6666     if (RVAT) {
6667       // FIXME: This isn't correct! But tricky to implement because
6668       // the array's size has to be the size of RHS, but the type
6669       // has to be different.
6670       return RHS;
6671     }
6672     if (getCanonicalType(LHSElem) == getCanonicalType(ResultType)) return LHS;
6673     if (getCanonicalType(RHSElem) == getCanonicalType(ResultType)) return RHS;
6674     return getIncompleteArrayType(ResultType,
6675                                   ArrayType::ArraySizeModifier(), 0);
6676   }
6677   case Type::FunctionNoProto:
6678     return mergeFunctionTypes(LHS, RHS, OfBlockPointer, Unqualified);
6679   case Type::Record:
6680   case Type::Enum:
6681     return QualType();
6682   case Type::Builtin:
6683     // Only exactly equal builtin types are compatible, which is tested above.
6684     return QualType();
6685   case Type::Complex:
6686     // Distinct complex types are incompatible.
6687     return QualType();
6688   case Type::Vector:
6689     // FIXME: The merged type should be an ExtVector!
6690     if (areCompatVectorTypes(LHSCan->getAs<VectorType>(),
6691                              RHSCan->getAs<VectorType>()))
6692       return LHS;
6693     return QualType();
6694   case Type::ObjCObject: {
6695     // Check if the types are assignment compatible.
6696     // FIXME: This should be type compatibility, e.g. whether
6697     // "LHS x; RHS x;" at global scope is legal.
6698     const ObjCObjectType* LHSIface = LHS->getAs<ObjCObjectType>();
6699     const ObjCObjectType* RHSIface = RHS->getAs<ObjCObjectType>();
6700     if (canAssignObjCInterfaces(LHSIface, RHSIface))
6701       return LHS;
6702 
6703     return QualType();
6704   }
6705   case Type::ObjCObjectPointer: {
6706     if (OfBlockPointer) {
6707       if (canAssignObjCInterfacesInBlockPointer(
6708                                           LHS->getAs<ObjCObjectPointerType>(),
6709                                           RHS->getAs<ObjCObjectPointerType>(),
6710                                           BlockReturnType))
6711         return LHS;
6712       return QualType();
6713     }
6714     if (canAssignObjCInterfaces(LHS->getAs<ObjCObjectPointerType>(),
6715                                 RHS->getAs<ObjCObjectPointerType>()))
6716       return LHS;
6717 
6718     return QualType();
6719   }
6720   }
6721 
6722   llvm_unreachable("Invalid Type::Class!");
6723 }
6724 
FunctionTypesMatchOnNSConsumedAttrs(const FunctionProtoType * FromFunctionType,const FunctionProtoType * ToFunctionType)6725 bool ASTContext::FunctionTypesMatchOnNSConsumedAttrs(
6726                    const FunctionProtoType *FromFunctionType,
6727                    const FunctionProtoType *ToFunctionType) {
6728   if (FromFunctionType->hasAnyConsumedArgs() !=
6729       ToFunctionType->hasAnyConsumedArgs())
6730     return false;
6731   FunctionProtoType::ExtProtoInfo FromEPI =
6732     FromFunctionType->getExtProtoInfo();
6733   FunctionProtoType::ExtProtoInfo ToEPI =
6734     ToFunctionType->getExtProtoInfo();
6735   if (FromEPI.ConsumedArguments && ToEPI.ConsumedArguments)
6736     for (unsigned ArgIdx = 0, NumArgs = FromFunctionType->getNumArgs();
6737          ArgIdx != NumArgs; ++ArgIdx)  {
6738       if (FromEPI.ConsumedArguments[ArgIdx] !=
6739           ToEPI.ConsumedArguments[ArgIdx])
6740         return false;
6741     }
6742   return true;
6743 }
6744 
6745 /// mergeObjCGCQualifiers - This routine merges ObjC's GC attribute of 'LHS' and
6746 /// 'RHS' attributes and returns the merged version; including for function
6747 /// return types.
mergeObjCGCQualifiers(QualType LHS,QualType RHS)6748 QualType ASTContext::mergeObjCGCQualifiers(QualType LHS, QualType RHS) {
6749   QualType LHSCan = getCanonicalType(LHS),
6750   RHSCan = getCanonicalType(RHS);
6751   // If two types are identical, they are compatible.
6752   if (LHSCan == RHSCan)
6753     return LHS;
6754   if (RHSCan->isFunctionType()) {
6755     if (!LHSCan->isFunctionType())
6756       return QualType();
6757     QualType OldReturnType =
6758       cast<FunctionType>(RHSCan.getTypePtr())->getResultType();
6759     QualType NewReturnType =
6760       cast<FunctionType>(LHSCan.getTypePtr())->getResultType();
6761     QualType ResReturnType =
6762       mergeObjCGCQualifiers(NewReturnType, OldReturnType);
6763     if (ResReturnType.isNull())
6764       return QualType();
6765     if (ResReturnType == NewReturnType || ResReturnType == OldReturnType) {
6766       // id foo(); ... __strong id foo(); or: __strong id foo(); ... id foo();
6767       // In either case, use OldReturnType to build the new function type.
6768       const FunctionType *F = LHS->getAs<FunctionType>();
6769       if (const FunctionProtoType *FPT = cast<FunctionProtoType>(F)) {
6770         FunctionProtoType::ExtProtoInfo EPI = FPT->getExtProtoInfo();
6771         EPI.ExtInfo = getFunctionExtInfo(LHS);
6772         QualType ResultType
6773           = getFunctionType(OldReturnType, FPT->arg_type_begin(),
6774                             FPT->getNumArgs(), EPI);
6775         return ResultType;
6776       }
6777     }
6778     return QualType();
6779   }
6780 
6781   // If the qualifiers are different, the types can still be merged.
6782   Qualifiers LQuals = LHSCan.getLocalQualifiers();
6783   Qualifiers RQuals = RHSCan.getLocalQualifiers();
6784   if (LQuals != RQuals) {
6785     // If any of these qualifiers are different, we have a type mismatch.
6786     if (LQuals.getCVRQualifiers() != RQuals.getCVRQualifiers() ||
6787         LQuals.getAddressSpace() != RQuals.getAddressSpace())
6788       return QualType();
6789 
6790     // Exactly one GC qualifier difference is allowed: __strong is
6791     // okay if the other type has no GC qualifier but is an Objective
6792     // C object pointer (i.e. implicitly strong by default).  We fix
6793     // this by pretending that the unqualified type was actually
6794     // qualified __strong.
6795     Qualifiers::GC GC_L = LQuals.getObjCGCAttr();
6796     Qualifiers::GC GC_R = RQuals.getObjCGCAttr();
6797     assert((GC_L != GC_R) && "unequal qualifier sets had only equal elements");
6798 
6799     if (GC_L == Qualifiers::Weak || GC_R == Qualifiers::Weak)
6800       return QualType();
6801 
6802     if (GC_L == Qualifiers::Strong)
6803       return LHS;
6804     if (GC_R == Qualifiers::Strong)
6805       return RHS;
6806     return QualType();
6807   }
6808 
6809   if (LHSCan->isObjCObjectPointerType() && RHSCan->isObjCObjectPointerType()) {
6810     QualType LHSBaseQT = LHS->getAs<ObjCObjectPointerType>()->getPointeeType();
6811     QualType RHSBaseQT = RHS->getAs<ObjCObjectPointerType>()->getPointeeType();
6812     QualType ResQT = mergeObjCGCQualifiers(LHSBaseQT, RHSBaseQT);
6813     if (ResQT == LHSBaseQT)
6814       return LHS;
6815     if (ResQT == RHSBaseQT)
6816       return RHS;
6817   }
6818   return QualType();
6819 }
6820 
6821 //===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
6822 //                         Integer Predicates
6823 //===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
6824 
getIntWidth(QualType T) const6825 unsigned ASTContext::getIntWidth(QualType T) const {
6826   if (const EnumType *ET = dyn_cast<EnumType>(T))
6827     T = ET->getDecl()->getIntegerType();
6828   if (T->isBooleanType())
6829     return 1;
6830   // For builtin types, just use the standard type sizing method
6831   return (unsigned)getTypeSize(T);
6832 }
6833 
getCorrespondingUnsignedType(QualType T) const6834 QualType ASTContext::getCorrespondingUnsignedType(QualType T) const {
6835   assert(T->hasSignedIntegerRepresentation() && "Unexpected type");
6836 
6837   // Turn <4 x signed int> -> <4 x unsigned int>
6838   if (const VectorType *VTy = T->getAs<VectorType>())
6839     return getVectorType(getCorrespondingUnsignedType(VTy->getElementType()),
6840                          VTy->getNumElements(), VTy->getVectorKind());
6841 
6842   // For enums, we return the unsigned version of the base type.
6843   if (const EnumType *ETy = T->getAs<EnumType>())
6844     T = ETy->getDecl()->getIntegerType();
6845 
6846   const BuiltinType *BTy = T->getAs<BuiltinType>();
6847   assert(BTy && "Unexpected signed integer type");
6848   switch (BTy->getKind()) {
6849   case BuiltinType::Char_S:
6850   case BuiltinType::SChar:
6851     return UnsignedCharTy;
6852   case BuiltinType::Short:
6853     return UnsignedShortTy;
6854   case BuiltinType::Int:
6855     return UnsignedIntTy;
6856   case BuiltinType::Long:
6857     return UnsignedLongTy;
6858   case BuiltinType::LongLong:
6859     return UnsignedLongLongTy;
6860   case BuiltinType::Int128:
6861     return UnsignedInt128Ty;
6862   default:
6863     llvm_unreachable("Unexpected signed integer type");
6864   }
6865 }
6866 
~ASTMutationListener()6867 ASTMutationListener::~ASTMutationListener() { }
6868 
6869 
6870 //===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
6871 //                          Builtin Type Computation
6872 //===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
6873 
6874 /// DecodeTypeFromStr - This decodes one type descriptor from Str, advancing the
6875 /// pointer over the consumed characters.  This returns the resultant type.  If
6876 /// AllowTypeModifiers is false then modifier like * are not parsed, just basic
6877 /// types.  This allows "v2i*" to be parsed as a pointer to a v2i instead of
6878 /// a vector of "i*".
6879 ///
6880 /// RequiresICE is filled in on return to indicate whether the value is required
6881 /// to be an Integer Constant Expression.
DecodeTypeFromStr(const char * & Str,const ASTContext & Context,ASTContext::GetBuiltinTypeError & Error,bool & RequiresICE,bool AllowTypeModifiers)6882 static QualType DecodeTypeFromStr(const char *&Str, const ASTContext &Context,
6883                                   ASTContext::GetBuiltinTypeError &Error,
6884                                   bool &RequiresICE,
6885                                   bool AllowTypeModifiers) {
6886   // Modifiers.
6887   int HowLong = 0;
6888   bool Signed = false, Unsigned = false;
6889   RequiresICE = false;
6890 
6891   // Read the prefixed modifiers first.
6892   bool Done = false;
6893   while (!Done) {
6894     switch (*Str++) {
6895     default: Done = true; --Str; break;
6896     case 'I':
6897       RequiresICE = true;
6898       break;
6899     case 'S':
6900       assert(!Unsigned && "Can't use both 'S' and 'U' modifiers!");
6901       assert(!Signed && "Can't use 'S' modifier multiple times!");
6902       Signed = true;
6903       break;
6904     case 'U':
6905       assert(!Signed && "Can't use both 'S' and 'U' modifiers!");
6906       assert(!Unsigned && "Can't use 'S' modifier multiple times!");
6907       Unsigned = true;
6908       break;
6909     case 'L':
6910       assert(HowLong <= 2 && "Can't have LLLL modifier");
6911       ++HowLong;
6912       break;
6913     }
6914   }
6915 
6916   QualType Type;
6917 
6918   // Read the base type.
6919   switch (*Str++) {
6920   default: llvm_unreachable("Unknown builtin type letter!");
6921   case 'v':
6922     assert(HowLong == 0 && !Signed && !Unsigned &&
6923            "Bad modifiers used with 'v'!");
6924     Type = Context.VoidTy;
6925     break;
6926   case 'f':
6927     assert(HowLong == 0 && !Signed && !Unsigned &&
6928            "Bad modifiers used with 'f'!");
6929     Type = Context.FloatTy;
6930     break;
6931   case 'd':
6932     assert(HowLong < 2 && !Signed && !Unsigned &&
6933            "Bad modifiers used with 'd'!");
6934     if (HowLong)
6935       Type = Context.LongDoubleTy;
6936     else
6937       Type = Context.DoubleTy;
6938     break;
6939   case 's':
6940     assert(HowLong == 0 && "Bad modifiers used with 's'!");
6941     if (Unsigned)
6942       Type = Context.UnsignedShortTy;
6943     else
6944       Type = Context.ShortTy;
6945     break;
6946   case 'i':
6947     if (HowLong == 3)
6948       Type = Unsigned ? Context.UnsignedInt128Ty : Context.Int128Ty;
6949     else if (HowLong == 2)
6950       Type = Unsigned ? Context.UnsignedLongLongTy : Context.LongLongTy;
6951     else if (HowLong == 1)
6952       Type = Unsigned ? Context.UnsignedLongTy : Context.LongTy;
6953     else
6954       Type = Unsigned ? Context.UnsignedIntTy : Context.IntTy;
6955     break;
6956   case 'c':
6957     assert(HowLong == 0 && "Bad modifiers used with 'c'!");
6958     if (Signed)
6959       Type = Context.SignedCharTy;
6960     else if (Unsigned)
6961       Type = Context.UnsignedCharTy;
6962     else
6963       Type = Context.CharTy;
6964     break;
6965   case 'b': // boolean
6966     assert(HowLong == 0 && !Signed && !Unsigned && "Bad modifiers for 'b'!");
6967     Type = Context.BoolTy;
6968     break;
6969   case 'z':  // size_t.
6970     assert(HowLong == 0 && !Signed && !Unsigned && "Bad modifiers for 'z'!");
6971     Type = Context.getSizeType();
6972     break;
6973   case 'F':
6974     Type = Context.getCFConstantStringType();
6975     break;
6976   case 'G':
6977     Type = Context.getObjCIdType();
6978     break;
6979   case 'H':
6980     Type = Context.getObjCSelType();
6981     break;
6982   case 'a':
6983     Type = Context.getBuiltinVaListType();
6984     assert(!Type.isNull() && "builtin va list type not initialized!");
6985     break;
6986   case 'A':
6987     // This is a "reference" to a va_list; however, what exactly
6988     // this means depends on how va_list is defined. There are two
6989     // different kinds of va_list: ones passed by value, and ones
6990     // passed by reference.  An example of a by-value va_list is
6991     // x86, where va_list is a char*. An example of by-ref va_list
6992     // is x86-64, where va_list is a __va_list_tag[1]. For x86,
6993     // we want this argument to be a char*&; for x86-64, we want
6994     // it to be a __va_list_tag*.
6995     Type = Context.getBuiltinVaListType();
6996     assert(!Type.isNull() && "builtin va list type not initialized!");
6997     if (Type->isArrayType())
6998       Type = Context.getArrayDecayedType(Type);
6999     else
7000       Type = Context.getLValueReferenceType(Type);
7001     break;
7002   case 'V': {
7003     char *End;
7004     unsigned NumElements = strtoul(Str, &End, 10);
7005     assert(End != Str && "Missing vector size");
7006     Str = End;
7007 
7008     QualType ElementType = DecodeTypeFromStr(Str, Context, Error,
7009                                              RequiresICE, false);
7010     assert(!RequiresICE && "Can't require vector ICE");
7011 
7012     // TODO: No way to make AltiVec vectors in builtins yet.
7013     Type = Context.getVectorType(ElementType, NumElements,
7014                                  VectorType::GenericVector);
7015     break;
7016   }
7017   case 'E': {
7018     char *End;
7019 
7020     unsigned NumElements = strtoul(Str, &End, 10);
7021     assert(End != Str && "Missing vector size");
7022 
7023     Str = End;
7024 
7025     QualType ElementType = DecodeTypeFromStr(Str, Context, Error, RequiresICE,
7026                                              false);
7027     Type = Context.getExtVectorType(ElementType, NumElements);
7028     break;
7029   }
7030   case 'X': {
7031     QualType ElementType = DecodeTypeFromStr(Str, Context, Error, RequiresICE,
7032                                              false);
7033     assert(!RequiresICE && "Can't require complex ICE");
7034     Type = Context.getComplexType(ElementType);
7035     break;
7036   }
7037   case 'Y' : {
7038     Type = Context.getPointerDiffType();
7039     break;
7040   }
7041   case 'P':
7042     Type = Context.getFILEType();
7043     if (Type.isNull()) {
7044       Error = ASTContext::GE_Missing_stdio;
7045       return QualType();
7046     }
7047     break;
7048   case 'J':
7049     if (Signed)
7050       Type = Context.getsigjmp_bufType();
7051     else
7052       Type = Context.getjmp_bufType();
7053 
7054     if (Type.isNull()) {
7055       Error = ASTContext::GE_Missing_setjmp;
7056       return QualType();
7057     }
7058     break;
7059   case 'K':
7060     assert(HowLong == 0 && !Signed && !Unsigned && "Bad modifiers for 'K'!");
7061     Type = Context.getucontext_tType();
7062 
7063     if (Type.isNull()) {
7064       Error = ASTContext::GE_Missing_ucontext;
7065       return QualType();
7066     }
7067     break;
7068   }
7069 
7070   // If there are modifiers and if we're allowed to parse them, go for it.
7071   Done = !AllowTypeModifiers;
7072   while (!Done) {
7073     switch (char c = *Str++) {
7074     default: Done = true; --Str; break;
7075     case '*':
7076     case '&': {
7077       // Both pointers and references can have their pointee types
7078       // qualified with an address space.
7079       char *End;
7080       unsigned AddrSpace = strtoul(Str, &End, 10);
7081       if (End != Str && AddrSpace != 0) {
7082         Type = Context.getAddrSpaceQualType(Type, AddrSpace);
7083         Str = End;
7084       }
7085       if (c == '*')
7086         Type = Context.getPointerType(Type);
7087       else
7088         Type = Context.getLValueReferenceType(Type);
7089       break;
7090     }
7091     // FIXME: There's no way to have a built-in with an rvalue ref arg.
7092     case 'C':
7093       Type = Type.withConst();
7094       break;
7095     case 'D':
7096       Type = Context.getVolatileType(Type);
7097       break;
7098     case 'R':
7099       Type = Type.withRestrict();
7100       break;
7101     }
7102   }
7103 
7104   assert((!RequiresICE || Type->isIntegralOrEnumerationType()) &&
7105          "Integer constant 'I' type must be an integer");
7106 
7107   return Type;
7108 }
7109 
7110 /// GetBuiltinType - Return the type for the specified builtin.
GetBuiltinType(unsigned Id,GetBuiltinTypeError & Error,unsigned * IntegerConstantArgs) const7111 QualType ASTContext::GetBuiltinType(unsigned Id,
7112                                     GetBuiltinTypeError &Error,
7113                                     unsigned *IntegerConstantArgs) const {
7114   const char *TypeStr = BuiltinInfo.GetTypeString(Id);
7115 
7116   SmallVector<QualType, 8> ArgTypes;
7117 
7118   bool RequiresICE = false;
7119   Error = GE_None;
7120   QualType ResType = DecodeTypeFromStr(TypeStr, *this, Error,
7121                                        RequiresICE, true);
7122   if (Error != GE_None)
7123     return QualType();
7124 
7125   assert(!RequiresICE && "Result of intrinsic cannot be required to be an ICE");
7126 
7127   while (TypeStr[0] && TypeStr[0] != '.') {
7128     QualType Ty = DecodeTypeFromStr(TypeStr, *this, Error, RequiresICE, true);
7129     if (Error != GE_None)
7130       return QualType();
7131 
7132     // If this argument is required to be an IntegerConstantExpression and the
7133     // caller cares, fill in the bitmask we return.
7134     if (RequiresICE && IntegerConstantArgs)
7135       *IntegerConstantArgs |= 1 << ArgTypes.size();
7136 
7137     // Do array -> pointer decay.  The builtin should use the decayed type.
7138     if (Ty->isArrayType())
7139       Ty = getArrayDecayedType(Ty);
7140 
7141     ArgTypes.push_back(Ty);
7142   }
7143 
7144   assert((TypeStr[0] != '.' || TypeStr[1] == 0) &&
7145          "'.' should only occur at end of builtin type list!");
7146 
7147   FunctionType::ExtInfo EI;
7148   if (BuiltinInfo.isNoReturn(Id)) EI = EI.withNoReturn(true);
7149 
7150   bool Variadic = (TypeStr[0] == '.');
7151 
7152   // We really shouldn't be making a no-proto type here, especially in C++.
7153   if (ArgTypes.empty() && Variadic)
7154     return getFunctionNoProtoType(ResType, EI);
7155 
7156   FunctionProtoType::ExtProtoInfo EPI;
7157   EPI.ExtInfo = EI;
7158   EPI.Variadic = Variadic;
7159 
7160   return getFunctionType(ResType, ArgTypes.data(), ArgTypes.size(), EPI);
7161 }
7162 
GetGVALinkageForFunction(const FunctionDecl * FD)7163 GVALinkage ASTContext::GetGVALinkageForFunction(const FunctionDecl *FD) {
7164   GVALinkage External = GVA_StrongExternal;
7165 
7166   Linkage L = FD->getLinkage();
7167   switch (L) {
7168   case NoLinkage:
7169   case InternalLinkage:
7170   case UniqueExternalLinkage:
7171     return GVA_Internal;
7172 
7173   case ExternalLinkage:
7174     switch (FD->getTemplateSpecializationKind()) {
7175     case TSK_Undeclared:
7176     case TSK_ExplicitSpecialization:
7177       External = GVA_StrongExternal;
7178       break;
7179 
7180     case TSK_ExplicitInstantiationDefinition:
7181       return GVA_ExplicitTemplateInstantiation;
7182 
7183     case TSK_ExplicitInstantiationDeclaration:
7184     case TSK_ImplicitInstantiation:
7185       External = GVA_TemplateInstantiation;
7186       break;
7187     }
7188   }
7189 
7190   if (!FD->isInlined())
7191     return External;
7192 
7193   if (!getLangOpts().CPlusPlus || FD->hasAttr<GNUInlineAttr>()) {
7194     // GNU or C99 inline semantics. Determine whether this symbol should be
7195     // externally visible.
7196     if (FD->isInlineDefinitionExternallyVisible())
7197       return External;
7198 
7199     // C99 inline semantics, where the symbol is not externally visible.
7200     return GVA_C99Inline;
7201   }
7202 
7203   // C++0x [temp.explicit]p9:
7204   //   [ Note: The intent is that an inline function that is the subject of
7205   //   an explicit instantiation declaration will still be implicitly
7206   //   instantiated when used so that the body can be considered for
7207   //   inlining, but that no out-of-line copy of the inline function would be
7208   //   generated in the translation unit. -- end note ]
7209   if (FD->getTemplateSpecializationKind()
7210                                        == TSK_ExplicitInstantiationDeclaration)
7211     return GVA_C99Inline;
7212 
7213   return GVA_CXXInline;
7214 }
7215 
GetGVALinkageForVariable(const VarDecl * VD)7216 GVALinkage ASTContext::GetGVALinkageForVariable(const VarDecl *VD) {
7217   // If this is a static data member, compute the kind of template
7218   // specialization. Otherwise, this variable is not part of a
7219   // template.
7220   TemplateSpecializationKind TSK = TSK_Undeclared;
7221   if (VD->isStaticDataMember())
7222     TSK = VD->getTemplateSpecializationKind();
7223 
7224   Linkage L = VD->getLinkage();
7225   if (L == ExternalLinkage && getLangOpts().CPlusPlus &&
7226       VD->getType()->getLinkage() == UniqueExternalLinkage)
7227     L = UniqueExternalLinkage;
7228 
7229   switch (L) {
7230   case NoLinkage:
7231   case InternalLinkage:
7232   case UniqueExternalLinkage:
7233     return GVA_Internal;
7234 
7235   case ExternalLinkage:
7236     switch (TSK) {
7237     case TSK_Undeclared:
7238     case TSK_ExplicitSpecialization:
7239       return GVA_StrongExternal;
7240 
7241     case TSK_ExplicitInstantiationDeclaration:
7242       llvm_unreachable("Variable should not be instantiated");
7243       // Fall through to treat this like any other instantiation.
7244 
7245     case TSK_ExplicitInstantiationDefinition:
7246       return GVA_ExplicitTemplateInstantiation;
7247 
7248     case TSK_ImplicitInstantiation:
7249       return GVA_TemplateInstantiation;
7250     }
7251   }
7252 
7253   llvm_unreachable("Invalid Linkage!");
7254 }
7255 
DeclMustBeEmitted(const Decl * D)7256 bool ASTContext::DeclMustBeEmitted(const Decl *D) {
7257   if (const VarDecl *VD = dyn_cast<VarDecl>(D)) {
7258     if (!VD->isFileVarDecl())
7259       return false;
7260   } else if (!isa<FunctionDecl>(D))
7261     return false;
7262 
7263   // Weak references don't produce any output by themselves.
7264   if (D->hasAttr<WeakRefAttr>())
7265     return false;
7266 
7267   // Aliases and used decls are required.
7268   if (D->hasAttr<AliasAttr>() || D->hasAttr<UsedAttr>())
7269     return true;
7270 
7271   if (const FunctionDecl *FD = dyn_cast<FunctionDecl>(D)) {
7272     // Forward declarations aren't required.
7273     if (!FD->doesThisDeclarationHaveABody())
7274       return FD->doesDeclarationForceExternallyVisibleDefinition();
7275 
7276     // Constructors and destructors are required.
7277     if (FD->hasAttr<ConstructorAttr>() || FD->hasAttr<DestructorAttr>())
7278       return true;
7279 
7280     // The key function for a class is required.
7281     if (const CXXMethodDecl *MD = dyn_cast<CXXMethodDecl>(FD)) {
7282       const CXXRecordDecl *RD = MD->getParent();
7283       if (MD->isOutOfLine() && RD->isDynamicClass()) {
7284         const CXXMethodDecl *KeyFunc = getKeyFunction(RD);
7285         if (KeyFunc && KeyFunc->getCanonicalDecl() == MD->getCanonicalDecl())
7286           return true;
7287       }
7288     }
7289 
7290     GVALinkage Linkage = GetGVALinkageForFunction(FD);
7291 
7292     // static, static inline, always_inline, and extern inline functions can
7293     // always be deferred.  Normal inline functions can be deferred in C99/C++.
7294     // Implicit template instantiations can also be deferred in C++.
7295     if (Linkage == GVA_Internal  || Linkage == GVA_C99Inline ||
7296         Linkage == GVA_CXXInline || Linkage == GVA_TemplateInstantiation)
7297       return false;
7298     return true;
7299   }
7300 
7301   const VarDecl *VD = cast<VarDecl>(D);
7302   assert(VD->isFileVarDecl() && "Expected file scoped var");
7303 
7304   if (VD->isThisDeclarationADefinition() == VarDecl::DeclarationOnly)
7305     return false;
7306 
7307   // Structs that have non-trivial constructors or destructors are required.
7308 
7309   // FIXME: Handle references.
7310   // FIXME: Be more selective about which constructors we care about.
7311   if (const RecordType *RT = VD->getType()->getAs<RecordType>()) {
7312     if (const CXXRecordDecl *RD = dyn_cast<CXXRecordDecl>(RT->getDecl())) {
7313       if (RD->hasDefinition() && !(RD->hasTrivialDefaultConstructor() &&
7314                                    RD->hasTrivialCopyConstructor() &&
7315                                    RD->hasTrivialMoveConstructor() &&
7316                                    RD->hasTrivialDestructor()))
7317         return true;
7318     }
7319   }
7320 
7321   GVALinkage L = GetGVALinkageForVariable(VD);
7322   if (L == GVA_Internal || L == GVA_TemplateInstantiation) {
7323     if (!(VD->getInit() && VD->getInit()->HasSideEffects(*this)))
7324       return false;
7325   }
7326 
7327   return true;
7328 }
7329 
getDefaultCXXMethodCallConv(bool isVariadic)7330 CallingConv ASTContext::getDefaultCXXMethodCallConv(bool isVariadic) {
7331   // Pass through to the C++ ABI object
7332   return ABI->getDefaultMethodCallConv(isVariadic);
7333 }
7334 
getCanonicalCallConv(CallingConv CC) const7335 CallingConv ASTContext::getCanonicalCallConv(CallingConv CC) const {
7336   if (CC == CC_C && !LangOpts.MRTD && getTargetInfo().getCXXABI() != CXXABI_Microsoft)
7337     return CC_Default;
7338   return CC;
7339 }
7340 
isNearlyEmpty(const CXXRecordDecl * RD) const7341 bool ASTContext::isNearlyEmpty(const CXXRecordDecl *RD) const {
7342   // Pass through to the C++ ABI object
7343   return ABI->isNearlyEmpty(RD);
7344 }
7345 
createMangleContext()7346 MangleContext *ASTContext::createMangleContext() {
7347   switch (Target->getCXXABI()) {
7348   case CXXABI_ARM:
7349   case CXXABI_Itanium:
7350     return createItaniumMangleContext(*this, getDiagnostics());
7351   case CXXABI_Microsoft:
7352     return createMicrosoftMangleContext(*this, getDiagnostics());
7353   }
7354   llvm_unreachable("Unsupported ABI");
7355 }
7356 
~CXXABI()7357 CXXABI::~CXXABI() {}
7358 
getSideTableAllocatedMemory() const7359 size_t ASTContext::getSideTableAllocatedMemory() const {
7360   return ASTRecordLayouts.getMemorySize()
7361     + llvm::capacity_in_bytes(ObjCLayouts)
7362     + llvm::capacity_in_bytes(KeyFunctions)
7363     + llvm::capacity_in_bytes(ObjCImpls)
7364     + llvm::capacity_in_bytes(BlockVarCopyInits)
7365     + llvm::capacity_in_bytes(DeclAttrs)
7366     + llvm::capacity_in_bytes(InstantiatedFromStaticDataMember)
7367     + llvm::capacity_in_bytes(InstantiatedFromUsingDecl)
7368     + llvm::capacity_in_bytes(InstantiatedFromUsingShadowDecl)
7369     + llvm::capacity_in_bytes(InstantiatedFromUnnamedFieldDecl)
7370     + llvm::capacity_in_bytes(OverriddenMethods)
7371     + llvm::capacity_in_bytes(Types)
7372     + llvm::capacity_in_bytes(VariableArrayTypes)
7373     + llvm::capacity_in_bytes(ClassScopeSpecializationPattern);
7374 }
7375 
getLambdaManglingNumber(CXXMethodDecl * CallOperator)7376 unsigned ASTContext::getLambdaManglingNumber(CXXMethodDecl *CallOperator) {
7377   CXXRecordDecl *Lambda = CallOperator->getParent();
7378   return LambdaMangleContexts[Lambda->getDeclContext()]
7379            .getManglingNumber(CallOperator);
7380 }
7381 
7382 
setParameterIndex(const ParmVarDecl * D,unsigned int index)7383 void ASTContext::setParameterIndex(const ParmVarDecl *D, unsigned int index) {
7384   ParamIndices[D] = index;
7385 }
7386 
getParameterIndex(const ParmVarDecl * D) const7387 unsigned ASTContext::getParameterIndex(const ParmVarDecl *D) const {
7388   ParameterIndexTable::const_iterator I = ParamIndices.find(D);
7389   assert(I != ParamIndices.end() &&
7390          "ParmIndices lacks entry set by ParmVarDecl");
7391   return I->second;
7392 }
7393